You are on page 1of 239

Enhancement Package 1 for

SAP SuppIy Chain Management 7.0



ReIease Notes
______________________________________________________________
Copyright
Copyright(c) 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
Neither this document nor any part of it may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any
means or translated into another language, without the prior consent of SAP AG. The
information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
SAP is a registered trademark of SAP AG.
All other products which are mentioned in this documentation are registered or not registered
trademarks of their respective companies.
1 CA Cross-Application Components 1
1.1 CA-BFA Business Framework Architecture 2
1.1.1 ERP, New User Interface for ABAP Lists (New) 3
1.2 CA-EPT Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications 4
1.2.1 FND_ANALYTICS_TOOLS: BF, Enhancements for Business Suite
Analytics (New) 4
1.2.2 /IPRO/FND_DOCUMENT_BUILDER: Business Function SAP Document
Builder (New) 4
1.2.3 /IPRO/FND_DOCUMENT_BUILDER: Document Generation (Enhanced) 5
1.2.4 FND_IDM_1: Business Function FND, Integration with SAP NW
IDM 7.1 (New) 6
1.2.5 CA-EPT-ANL Analytics
Infrastructure 7
1.2.5.1 FND_ANALYTICS_TOOLS: BI Content Activation Workbench 7
1.2.5.2 CA-EPT-ANL-LST List Reporting 8
1.2.5.2.1 FND_ANALYTICS_TOOLS: Analytics List Component 8
1.2.5.3 CA-EPT-ANL-ACT Content Activation 9
1.2.5.3.1 FND_ANALYTICS_TOOLS: BI Content Activation Workbench 9
1.2.6 CA-EPT-BCV Business Context Viewer 9
1.2.6.1 /BCV/MAIN: Configuration Center (New) 9
1.2.6.2 /BCV/MAIN: Technical Features (New) 12
1.2.6.3 /BCV/MAIN: Authorizations (New) 13
1.2.6.4 /BCV/MAIN: Business Function FND, Business Context Viewer
Main 14
1.2.7 CA-EPT-BOF Business Object Processing Framework 15
1.2.7.1 FPM BOPF Integration (New) 15
1.2.8 CA-EPT-IDM Identity Management: Business Suite
Processes 17
1.2.8.1 FND_IDM_1: SAP SNC Integration with SAP NW Identity Mgmt
(New) 17
1.2.8.2 FND_IDM_1: SAP CRM Integration with SAP NW Identity Mgmt
(New) 18
1.2.8.3 FND_IDM_1: FND, SAP SLcM Integration with SAP NW Identity
Mgmt (New) 19
1.2.8.4 IDM_1: FND, SAP SRM Integration with SAP NW Identity Mgmt
(New) 20
1.2.9 CA-EPT-IBO Suite Inbox 21
1.2.9.1 Inbox (Enhanced) 21
1.2.10 CA-EPT-NAV Object Navigator 22
1.2.10.1 Object Naviagtor (enhanced) 22
1.3 CA-FS Financial Services 22
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG iii
Release-Informationen Inhaltsverzeichnis SAP AG
______________________________________________________________
1.3.1 CA-FS-BP Business Partner Enhancements for
Financial Service 22
1.3.1.1 PSM_GEN_BUDPER_2: Using Budget Period in HCM SOA Services
(New) 22
1.3.1.2 PSM_GEN_BUDPER_2: Business Function PSM, Budget Period 2
(new) 23
1.3.2 CA-FS-ECH Error and Conflict Handler 24
1.3.2.1 Error and Conflict Handler (New) 24
1.4 CA-GTF General Application Functions 25
1.4.1 CA-GTF-PCF People Centric UI Framework 25
1.4.1.1 FND_SMB_UIE: SAP BP for UI Enhancement 25
1.4.2 CA-GTF-VBZ Visual Business 26
1.4.2.1 FND_VISUAL_BUSINESS: Business Function Visual Business (New) 26
1.5 CA-HR Cross-Application Objects in HR 27
1.5.1 HCM, Cross Analytics 27
1.5.2 HCM_NWBC_ROLES: Business Function HCM, Roles for SAP
NetWeaver Business 29
1.6 CA-MDG Master Data Governance 34
1.6.1 CA-MDG-AF Application Framework 34
1.6.1.1 MDG_FOUNDATION: Authorizations (New) 34
1.6.1.2 MDG_FOUNDATION: Master Data Change Process (New) 35
1.6.1.3 MDG_FOUNDATION: Data Model and UI Configuration (New) 36
1.6.2 CA-MDG-DRF Data Replication Framework 37
1.6.2.1 CA_MDG_DRF: Data Replication Framework (New) 37
1.6.3 CA-MDG-DQ Data Quality 38
1.6.3.1 MDG_FOUNDATION: Enhancing Master Data Quality (New) 38
1.6.4 CA-MDG-KM Key Mapping 39
1.6.4.1 CA_MDG_KM: Key Mapping (New) 40
1.6.5 CA-MDG-ML Mass Load 40
1.6.5.1 MDG_FOUNDATION: Mass Data Load (New) 40
1.6.6 CA-MDG-RIF Replication Interface Framework 41
1.6.6.1 CA_SUPPLIER_SOA: Business Foundation for Services for
Supplier (new) 41
1.6.6.2 MDG_FOUNDATION: Master Data Governance, Generic Functions
(New) 41
1.6.6.3 MDG_FOUNDATION: Replication Interface Framework (New) 42
1.6.7 CA-MDG-VM Value Mapping 43
1.6.7.1 CA_MDG_VM: Value Mapping (New) 43
1.7 CA-MOB Mobile Business Management 44
1.7.1 CA-MOB-MIB Mobile Productivity Applications 44
1.7.1.1 FND_MOBILEINBOX_WF_1: BF FND, Workflow & Alert (Mobile)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG iv
Release-Informationen Inhaltsverzeichnis SAP AG
______________________________________________________________
(New) 44
1.8 CA-SOA Enterprise SOA 45
1.8.1 FND_SOA_REUSE_1: Asynch. Point-to-Point Communication (New) 45
1.8.2 FND_SOA_REUSE_1: Business Function SOA Reuse Functions (New) 46
1.8.3 FND_SOA_REUSE_1: Error Categorizer (New) 47
1.8.4 CA-SOA-SMT Service Mapping Tool 48
1.8.4.1 FND_SOA_REUSE_1: Service Mapping Tool (New) 48
2 SCM Supply Chain Management 50
2.1 FND_IDM_1: SAP SNC Integration with SAP NW Identity Mgmt
(New) 50
2.2 SCM-APO Advanced Planning and Optimization 51
2.2.1 SCM_APO_HIER_AGG_PLAN: Hierarchy-Based Aggregated Planning
(New) 51
2.2.2 SCM_APO_HIER_AGG_PLAN: Enhancements in Interactive SNP (New) 52
2.2.3 SCM_APO_HIER_AGG_PLAN: Bus.Funct. SCM-APO, Aggregated
Planning in DP, 53
2.2.4 SCM_APO_DISTR_REC: BF SCM-APO, Plng. with SNC Planned Rcpt.
in APO (New) 53
2.2.5 SCM_APO_DP_SNP_CTM: BF SCM-APO, Chart Us. (DP/SNP), Merging
Ord. (CTM) 55
2.2.6 SCM_APO_DP_SNP_CTM: Chart and TLB Usability (New) 55
2.2.7 SCM_APO_DP_SNP_CTM: Consumption Modes (Enhanced) 57
2.2.8 SCM_APO_DRS_PLAN: Bus.Funct. SCM-APO, Third-Party Order
Planning in APO 57
2.2.9 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Performance Monitor (New) 59
2.2.10 SCM-APO-MD Master Data 59
2.2.10.1 SCM_APO_HIER_AGG_PLAN: Time-Dependent Location Product
Hierarchies (New) 59
2.2.11 SCM-APO-SDM Multilevel Supply & Demand Matching 60
2.2.11.1 SCM-APO-SDM-CTM Capable-to-Match 60
2.2.11.1.1 SCM_APO_DP_SNP_CTM: Enhancements in CTM (New) 60
2.2.12 SCM-APO-FCS Demand Planning 61
2.2.12.1 SCM_APO_DP_SNP_CTM: Display of Application Logs in Demand
Planning (New) 61
2.2.13 SCM-APO-SPP Service Parts Planning 62
2.2.13.1 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Supersession Available if BOD Contains
ROP Products 62
2.2.13.2 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Future BOD Available in Inventory
Planning (New) 63
2.2.13.3 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: DRP: Global Stock on Entry Location (New) 63
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG v
Release-Informationen Inhaltsverzeichnis SAP AG
______________________________________________________________
2.2.13.4 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: STO GATP Check in Deployment (New) 64
2.2.13.5 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Stability Rule Assignment for Location
Products in 64
2.2.13.6 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Sales Order PSM Trigger for DRP (New) 65
2.2.13.7 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Example ATP BAdI Implementation for
Realignment 65
2.2.13.8 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Selective Version Merge (New) 66
2.2.13.9 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Shortage Monitor and Worklist
Enhancements (New) 67
2.2.13.10 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Route Determination (New) 70
2.2.13.11 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Multi-Level Push Deployment (New) 71
2.2.13.12 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Performance Monitor (New) 72
2.2.13.13 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Trigger Monitoring (New) 73
2.2.13.14 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Flexible Bill of Distribution (BOD) (New) 73
2.2.13.15 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: UI Enhancements (New) 74
2.2.13.16 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Assignment of Products to a BOD
Improvement (New) 77
2.2.13.17 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Restocking in Stocking Decision Service
(New) 77
2.2.13.18 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: BF SCM-APO-SPP, Service Parts Planning 1
(New) 78
2.2.14 SCM-APO-MSP Maintenance and Service Planning 80
2.2.14.1 SCM_APO_MSP_EPS: Business Function SCM Enhanced MSP for MRO
(New) 80
2.2.15 SCM-APO-ATP Global Available-to-Promise 82
2.2.15.1 SCM_APO_ATP_1: Configurable Process Scheduling (New) 82
2.2.15.2 SCM_APO_ATP_1: Consistency of Descriptive Characteristics
(New) 82
2.2.15.3 SCM_APO_ATP_1: Expected Goods Movement (New) 83
2.2.15.4 SCM_APO_ATP_1: Bus.Funct. SCM-APO-ATP, Usb./Var. Fnct. (New) 84
2.2.15.5 SCM_APO_ATP_1: Product Allocation (New) 85
2.2.15.6 SCM_APO_ATP_1: MATP With Remaining Requirements (New) 86
2.2.15.7 SCM-APO-ATP-RBA Rules-Based ATP Check 86
2.2.15.7.1 SCM_APO_ATP_1: Multi-Item Single Delivery Location (New) 86
2.2.15.7.2 SCM_APO_ATP_1: Merging of Subitems (New) 87
2.2.15.8 SCM-APO-ATP-BOP Backorder Processing 88
2.2.15.8.1 SCM_APO_ATP_1: Backorder Processing (New) 88
2.2.15.9 SCM-APO-ATP-ODL Order Due List 90
2.2.15.9.1 SCM_APO_ATP_1: Order Due List (New) 90
2.2.15.10 SCM-APO-ATP-EQA Event-Driven Quantity Assignment
(EDQA) 91
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG vi
Release-Informationen Inhaltsverzeichnis SAP AG
______________________________________________________________
2.2.15.10.1 SCM_APO_ATP_1: Event-Driven Quantity Assignment (New) 91
2.3 SCM-BAS SCM Basis 92
2.3.1 SCM_APO_HIER_AGG_PLAN: Time-Dependent Location Product
Hierarchies (New) 92
2.3.2 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Assignment of Products to a BOD
Improvement (New) 93
2.3.3 SCM-BAS-SCH Configurable Process Scheduling 94
2.3.3.1 SCM_APO_ATP_1: Configurable Process Scheduling (New) 94
2.3.4 SCM-BAS-PSM Planning Service Manager 95
2.3.4.1 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Trigger Monitoring (New) 95
2.3.5 SCM-BAS-MD Master Data 95
2.3.5.1 SCM_APO_DP_SNP_CTM: Freely-Definable Attributes for 95
2.3.5.2 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Selective Version Merge (New) 96
2.3.5.3 SCM_SCMB_TM_FND1: Foundation of External Transportation
Management 97
2.3.5.4 SCM-BAS-MD-HI Hierarchy 98
2.3.5.4.1 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Flexible Bill of Distribution (BOD) (New) 98
2.3.5.5 SCM-BAS-MD-LO Location 99
2.3.5.5.1 SCM_SCMB_TM_FND1: Business Partner (Enhanced) 99
2.3.5.5.2 SCM_SCMB_TM_FND1: International Address Versions (New) 100
2.3.5.5.3 SCM_SCMB_TR_NETWORK: Geocoding (Enhanced) 100
2.3.5.5.4 SCM_SCMB_TR_NETWORK: Enhanced Services for Transportation
Network 101
2.3.5.6 SCM-BAS-MD-TL Transportation Lanes, TDL Profile
and Planning Cost 102
2.3.5.6.1 SCM_SCMB_TR_NETWORK: Distance and Duration Determination
(Enhanced) 102
2.3.5.6.2 SCM_SCMB_TR_NETWORK: Enhanced Services for Transportation
Network 103
2.3.6 SCM-BAS-EHS EH&S Services 104
2.3.6.1 SCM_EHS_DG_CI_1: EH&S Services SCM: Dang. Goods (new) 104
2.3.6.2 SCM-BAS-EHS-DG Dangerous Goods Management 104
2.3.6.2.1 SCM_EHS_DG_CI_1: EH&S Services SCM: Dang. Goods (new) 104
2.4 SCM-EWM Extended Warehouse Management 105
2.4.1 SCM_EWM_REV_LOG: Business Function EWM, Returns in the
Distribution 105
2.4.2 SCM_EWM_TRANS_INT_1: Business Function EWM, Integration with 107
2.4.3 SCM-EWM-DLP Delivery Processing 109
2.4.3.1 SCM_EWM_TRANS_INT_1: Effects on the User Interface (New) 109
2.4.4 SCM-EWM-MD Master Data 113
2.4.4.1 SCM_EWM_TRANS_INT_1: Effects on the User Interface (New) 113
2.4.5 SCM-EWM-SR Shipping and Receiving 116
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG vii
Release-Informationen Inhaltsverzeichnis SAP AG
______________________________________________________________
2.4.5.1 SCM_EWM_TRANS_INT_1: Effects on the User Interface (New) 116
2.5 SCM-EM Event Management 120
2.5.1 SCM_EM_HIGHVOL: Archiving Improvements (New) 120
2.5.2 SCM_EM_HIGHVOL: Performance Optimizations (New) 121
2.5.3 SCM_EM_HIGHVOL: Business Function EM, Archiving and Web
Interface 123
2.5.4 AIE_OER_PTACOLDCHAIN: Business Function OER, Perf.-Opt.
PTA/Cold Chain 124
2.5.5 SCM_EM_TMCONTENT01: EM, Visibility Proc. for External
Transportation 125
2.6 SCM-ICH Supply Network Collaboration 126
2.6.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Branding (New) 126
2.6.2 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: SAP SNC Monitoring with CCMS (Enhanced) 126
2.6.3 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Collaboration Folders Integration (Enhanced) 127
2.6.4 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: BI Extractors (Enhanced) 129
2.6.5 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Smart Forms (Enhanced) 130
2.6.6 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network
Collaboration 1 (New) 130
2.6.7 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Integration of Planned Receipts with the
Customer (New) 132
2.6.8 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quick View (Enhanced) 133
2.6.9 SCM-ICH-AFS Functions for SAP Apparel and
Footwear 135
2.6.9.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network
Collaboration 1 (New) 135
2.6.10 SCM-ICH-AMO Alert Monitor 137
2.6.10.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Alerts (Enhanced) 137
2.6.10.2 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Advanced Shipping Notifications
(Enhanced) 138
2.6.10.3 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Generation of ASN Alerts (Enhanced) 139
2.6.10.4 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: ASN Alert Types for Release Processing
(Enhanced) 140
2.6.10.5 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network
Collaboration 1 (New) 140
2.6.11 SCM-ICH-ASN Advanced Shipping Notification and
Shipment 142
2.6.11.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Advanced Shipping Notifications
(Enhanced) 142
2.6.11.2 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Generation of ASN Alerts (Enhanced) 144
2.6.11.3 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: ASN Alert Types for Release Processing
(Enhanced) 145
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG viii
Release-Informationen Inhaltsverzeichnis SAP AG
______________________________________________________________
2.6.11.4 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Due List for Pur.Docs. and R/R List (Changed) 145
2.6.11.5 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Goods Receipt Messages
(Changed) 146
2.6.11.6 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network
Collaboration 1 (New) 146
2.6.11.7 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Shipment Collaboration (New) 148
2.6.11.8 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens
(Enhanced) 151
2.6.12 SCM-ICH-DIO Inbound/Outbound Data Processing 153
2.6.12.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Navigation from RR Overview to DIC (New) 154
2.6.12.2 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Software Component SNC IC in ESR (New) 154
2.6.12.3 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Goods Receipt Messages
(Changed) 154
2.6.12.4 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network
Collaboration 1 (New) 155
2.6.13 SCM-ICH-EM Event Management for SAP SNC 157
2.6.13.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network
Collaboration 1 (New) 157
2.6.14 SCM-ICH-ERP ERP-SNC Integration 158
2.6.14.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Software Component SNC IC in ESR (New) 158
2.6.14.2 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network
Collaboration 1 (New) 159
2.6.14.3 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Confirmation (Enhanced) 161
2.6.15 SCM-ICH-FCS Forecast 161
2.6.15.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Due List for Pur.Docs. and R/R List (Changed) 161
2.6.15.2 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network
Collaboration 1 (New) 162
2.6.16 SCM-ICH-FTR File Transfer 164
2.6.16.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: File Transfer (Enhanced) 164
2.6.16.2 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network
Collaboration 1 (New) 165
2.6.17 SCM-ICH-IMO Inventory Monitor 167
2.6.17.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Navigation from RR Overview to DIC (New) 167
2.6.17.2 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network
Collaboration 1 (New) 167
2.6.18 SCM-ICH-IV Invoice 169
2.6.18.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network
Collaboration 1 (New) 169
2.6.18.2 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens
(Enhanced) 171
2.6.19 SCM-ICH-KNB Kanban 173
2.6.19.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG ix
Release-Informationen Inhaltsverzeichnis SAP AG
______________________________________________________________
Collaboration 1 (New) 173
2.6.20 SCM-ICH-MD Master Data 175
2.6.20.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network
Collaboration 1 (New) 175
2.6.20.2 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: User Administration (Enhanced) 177
2.6.21 SCM-ICH-NDC Net Requirements Calculation 178
2.6.21.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network
Collaboration 1 (New) 178
2.6.22 SCM-ICH-PO Purchase Order and Replenishment
Order 180
2.6.22.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Customer Batch Number (Changed) 180
2.6.22.2 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Due List for Pur.Docs. and R/R List (Changed) 180
2.6.22.3 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network
Collaboration 1 (New) 181
2.6.22.4 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order - Miscellaneous (Enhanced) 183
2.6.22.5 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Exceptions (New) 183
2.6.22.6 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Groups (New) 185
2.6.22.7 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Work List (Enhanced) 186
2.6.22.8 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Confirmation (Enhanced) 187
2.6.22.9 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Replenishment Order (Enhanced) 188
2.6.22.10 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Revision Level (New) 189
2.6.22.11 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens
(Enhanced) 190
2.6.23 SCM-ICH-PRO Promotion Planning 192
2.6.23.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network
Collaboration 1 (New) 192
2.6.23.2 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Promotion Collaboration (Enhanced) 194
2.6.24 SCM-ICH-QM Quality 196
2.6.24.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Advanced Shipping Notifications
(Enhanced) 196
2.6.24.2 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network
Collaboration 1 (New) 198
2.6.24.3 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quality Collaboration (New) 200
2.6.25 SCM-ICH-REL Scheduling Agreement Release 202
2.6.25.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Advanced Shipping Notifications
(Enhanced) 202
2.6.25.2 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: ASN Alert Types for Release Processing
(Enhanced) 204
2.6.25.3 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Due List for Pur.Docs. and R/R List (Changed) 204
2.6.25.4 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network
Collaboration 1 (New) 205
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG x
Release-Informationen Inhaltsverzeichnis SAP AG
______________________________________________________________
2.6.25.5 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Revision Level (New) 207
2.6.25.6 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens
(Enhanced) 208
2.6.26 SCM-ICH-REP Reporting 210
2.6.26.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network
Collaboration 1 (New) 210
2.6.27 SCM-ICH-RET Returns 212
2.6.27.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network
Collaboration 1 (New) 212
2.6.28 SCM-ICH-SCO Supplier Confirmations 214
2.6.28.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network
Collaboration 1 (New) 214
2.6.29 SCM-ICH-SNI Supply Network Inventory 216
2.6.29.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network
Collaboration 1 (New) 216
2.6.29.2 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Manual Change of Inventory Data for SNI (New) 217
2.6.29.3 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens
(Enhanced) 218
2.6.30 SCM-ICH-TLB Transport Load Builder 221
2.6.30.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network
Collaboration 1 (New) 221
2.6.30.2 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Product Prefilter for TLB Runs in PSM (New) 222
2.6.31 SCM-ICH-WO Work Order 223
2.6.31.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network
Collaboration 1 (New) 223
2.6.31.2 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Groups (New) 225
2.6.31.3 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens
(Enhanced) 226 230
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG xi
Release-Informationen Inhaltsverzeichnis SAP AG
______________________________________________________________
1 CA Cross-Application Components
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 1
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
1.1 CA-BFA Business Framework Architecture
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 2
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
1.1.1 ERP, New User Interface for ABAP Lists (New)
Use
As of SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702), business function ERP, New
User Interface for ABAP Lists (ERP_ALL_LISTS_2) is available. With this business function, you
can harmonize and standardize user interaction with ABAP lists.
Some previously delivered write lists are replaced by lists (mostly ALV) that provide increased usability
and harmonized end-user interaction. These new lists improve the end-user experience and help to reduce
training efforts.
Several of the previously delivered write lists provide highly individual graphical display and interaction
capabilities. With the new user interface, these capabilities are harmonized and unified.
For some reports, you can decide whether you would like to use the new user interface or one of the
previously delivered write lists. By default, the new user interface is used after switching on the business
function, but you can select to use the user interface of the previously delivered write list instead.
For more information, see SAP note no. 1302424. For more information on the former business function
ERP_ALL_LISTS, see SAP note no. 1180432.
Note: The new business function ERP_ALL_LISTS_2 is independent from the business function
ERP_ALL_LISTS. ERP_ALL_LIST_2 controls a different set of write lists.
Effects on Existing Data
Before switching on the business function, you should carefully consider the following:
- The end users may be very familiar with lists and may prefer not to adopt a new user interface.
- The unification of different specialized user interfaces sometimes means that you must relinquish
certain individual features.
See also
For more information, see SAP Library under Business Function Sets and Business Functions ->
Enterprise Business Functions -> Cross-Application Enterprise Business Functions -> ERP,
New User Interface for ABAP Lists.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 3
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
1.2 CA-EPT Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications
1.2.1 FND_ANALYTICS_TOOLS: BF, Enhancements for Business Suite
Analytics (New)
Use
As of SAP Business Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702), the business function Enhancements for
Business Suite Analytics (FND_ANALYTICS_TOOLS) is available. With this business function, the
following enhancements are provided:
- BI Content Activation Workbench
You can use the BI Content activation workbench to explore, select, and activate predefined BI
content. For more information, see the BI Content Activation Workbench release note.
- Scalability Level Configuration in Analytics Infrastructure
You can use the scalability level configuration to define which InfoProvider of a MultiProvider
should be accessed during a query execution. For more information, see the Scalability Level
Configuration (CA_BS_FND_702_ANI_2) release note.
- Analytics List Component GUIBB
You can use the analytics list component to embed analytical and planning content into
transactional applications without development effort. For more information, see the Analytics
List Component release note.
1.2.2 /IPRO/FND_DOCUMENT_BUILDER: Business Function SAP Document
Builder (New)
Use
As of SAP Business Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702), the business function SAP Document
Builder (/IPRO/FND_DOCUMENT_BUILDER) is available. With this business function, you can create
legally compliant documents using a customer-defined, standardized process, reducing the risk and cost
of legal actions resulting from inconsistent or non-standardized processes and documents. Using cockpits,
reviews, reports, and workflows, SAP Document Builder streamlines procurement processes and makes
them transparent throughout the document generation process. The standardization and streamlining of
processes increases compliance with internal and external standards, rules, and regulations while cutting
the cost of producing complex documents. SAP Document Builder also eliminates the need for a
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 4
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
third-party document authoring solution and associated integration and maintenance costs. SAP
Document Builder offers both automatic and manual document generation, as well as both single and
mass document generation.
For more information, see the release note /IPRO/FND_DOCUMENT_BUILDER: Document
Generation.
Effects on Existing Data
You must have SAP enhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 7.0 installed on your system.
Effects on Customizing
To use SAP Document Builder, you must activate the business function in Customizing under SAP
Customizing Implementation Guide -> Activate Business Functions.
See also
SAP Library for SAP Document Builder on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com -> SAP xApps -> SAP
Document Builder.
1.2.3 /IPRO/FND_DOCUMENT_BUILDER: Document Generation (Enhanced)
Use
As of SAP Business Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702), you can create simple and complex
documents using customer-defined formats, templates, and clause content. SAP Document Builder
dynamically creates legally compliant documents based on templates or business rules, enabling
standardized content, formats, and process flows. Centralized templates and content allow more visibility
into processes from start to finish thanks to the traceability of actions and versions. Processes are
streamlined and legal review time is saved. Document accessibility is controlled using roles, tailoring the
user experience to your needs.
Effects on Existing Data
The following changes were made to the SAP Document Builder application:
- You can now use fill-in variables in the header and footer, or overlay, of a document.
- The overlay has been enhanced to include a language field.
- The user status workflow has been enhanced.
- While maintaining elements, you can now reduce the number of objects or hide unnecessary fields
by creating a Web Dynpro configuration and using the Business Add-In (BAdI)
/IPRO/WD_CONFIG.
Depending on what forms you want to integrate, you must install the following:
- If you want to integrate Microsoft Word 2003 forms, you must install Microsoft Word 2003. If you
want to edit clauses using Microsoft Word, you must also install the Microsoft DSO Framer
ActiveX Control.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 5
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- If you want to integrate Adobe forms, you must install the SAP NetWeaver-based Adobe LiveCycle
Designer.
- If you want to combine PDF forms with text-based clauses to form an assembled legal document,
you must use Adobe LiveCycle PDF Generator or a similar third-party product.
Effects on Customizing
You make the Customizing settings for this function in Customizing for SAP Document Builder under the
following structure nodes:
- SAP Customizing Implementation Guide -> Cross-Application Components -> Document Builder ->
Basic Functions
- SAP Customizing Implementation Guide -> Cross-Application Components -> Document Builder ->
Regulation Sets and Elements
- SAP Customizing Implementation Guide -> Cross-Application Components -> Document Builder ->
Document Management
- SAP Customizing Implementation Guide -> Cross-Application Components -> Document Builder ->
Business Add-Ins
See also
Release Note IPRO/FND_DOCUMENT_BUILDER: Business Function SAP Document Builder
SAP Library for SAP Document Builder on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com -> SAP xApps -> SAP
Document Builder.
1.2.4 FND_IDM_1: Business Function FND, Integration with SAP NW IDM 7.1
(New)
Use
As of SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702) the business function FND, Integration
with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management is available. This business function provides you with
information about the integration of SAP Business Suite applications with SAP NetWeaver Identity
Management 7.1.
As of SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.02 new integration scenarios are available to support an
automated user management within a system landscape built primarily with SAP systems. The following
integration scenarios are new:
- Data transfer of Contact Person data (for Supplier) from SAP Supply Network Collaboration (as of
SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration 7.0) to SAP NetWeaver
Identiy Management 7.1 (Initial Load/Delta Load) to create or change identities.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 6
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Data transfer of Contact Person data (for Partner) from SAP Customer Relationship Management
(as of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Customer Relationship Management 7.0) to SAP
NetWeaver Identiy Management 7.1 (Initial Load/Delta Load) to create or change identities.
- Data transfer of Contact Person data (for Supplier and Bidder) from SAP Supplier Relationship
Management (as of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supplier Relationship Management 7.0)
to SAP NetWeaver Identiy Management 7.1 (Initial Load/Delta Load) to create or change identities.
- Data transfer of Student data from SAP Student Lifecycle Management (as of SAP enhancement
package 1 for SAP Student Lifecycle Management 7.0) to SAP NetWeaver Identiy Management 7.1
(Initial Load/Delta Load) to create or change identities.
If the integration is activated, data that is exchanged between SAP Business Suite applications and the
SAP NetWeaver Identiy Management is used for an automated user management and user distribution
within a given system landscape. SAP NetWeaver Identity Management acts as central hub to collect data
from several applications, create the respective identities in the Identity Management system and
distribute these identities across several systems to registered applications.
For more information about the new integration scenarios, see the following release notes:
- FND_IDM_1: SAP SCN Integration with SAP NW Identity Mgmt (New)
- FND_IDM_1: SAP CRM Integration with SAP NW Identity Mgmt (New)
- FND_IDM_1: SAP SLcM Integration with SAP NW Identity Mgmt (New)
- FND_IDM_1: SAP SRM Integration with SAP NW Identity Mgmt (New)
See also
For more information about all available integration scenarios, see SAP Library for SAP ERP under
Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications (CA-EPT) --> User Management and Distribution with
SAP NetWeaver Identity Management.
For more information about SAP NetWeaver Identity Management see SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com --> SAP Netweaver --> SAP NetWeaver Identity Management 7.1.
1.2.5 CA-EPT-ANL Analytics Infrastructure
1.2.5.1 FND_ANALYTICS_TOOLS: BI Content Activation Workbench
Use
As of SAP Business Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702), business function Enhancements for
Business Suite Analytics (FND_ANALYTICS_TOOLS), the BI Content activation workbench is
available.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 7
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
You can use the BI Content Activation Workbench (transaction BSANLY_BI_ACTIVATION) to
explore, select, and activate predefined BI Content. SAP provides selected BI Content structured along
business categories, such as processes. You can choose a category (for example, processes), check the
available BI Content bundles, and activate the content.
Using the BI Content activation workbench, you can activate BI Content in a local system as well as in
any remote system.
You can also use the Data Warehousing Workbench (transaction RSOR) to activate BI Content.
Effects on Customizing
You can also start the BI Content activation workbench under Cross-Application Components ->
Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications -> Analytics -> BI Content Activation
Workbench.
1.2.5.2 CA-EPT-ANL-LST List Reporting
1.2.5.2.1 FND_ANALYTICS_TOOLS: Analytics List Component
Use
As of SAP Business Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702), business function Enhancements for Business
Suite Analytics (FND_ANALYTICS_TOOLS), the Analytics List Component generic user interface
building block (GUIBB) is available, which you use in Floorplan Manager (FPM) to embed analytical
and planning content into transactional applications.
The following components are delivered:
- FPM generic user interface building block (GUIBB) for analytics purposes
Analytics List Component (WDC_BS_ANLY_LIST_ALV)
- FPM application
List Report on BW Query (WDA_BS_ANLY_LIST) with application configuration
APP_CFG_BS_ANLY_LIST
- Generic application controller
Generic Application Controller (WDC_BS_ANLY_APPCONTROLLER)
- Feeder class for GUIBB search
Feeder Class for Analytics List Component (CL_BS_ANLY_LIST_SEARCH_FEEDER)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 8
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
1.2.5.3 CA-EPT-ANL-ACT Content Activation
1.2.5.3.1 FND_ANALYTICS_TOOLS: BI Content Activation Workbench
Use
As of SAP Business Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702), business function Enhancements for
Business Suite Analytics (FND_ANALYTICS_TOOLS), the BI Content activation workbench is
available.
You can use the BI Content Activation Workbench (transaction BSANLY_BI_ACTIVATION) to
explore, select, and activate predefined BI Content. SAP provides selected BI Content structured along
business categories, such as processes. You can choose a category (for example, processes), check the
available BI Content bundles, and activate the content.
Using the BI Content activation workbench, you can activate BI Content in a local system as well as in
any remote system.
You can also use the Data Warehousing Workbench (transaction RSOR) to activate BI Content.
Effects on Customizing
You can also start the BI Content activation workbench under Cross-Application Components ->
Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications -> Analytics -> BI Content Activation
Workbench.
1.2.6 CA-EPT-BCV Business Context Viewer
1.2.6.1 /BCV/MAIN: Configuration Center (New)
Use
As of SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702), you can configure Business Context
Viewer (BCV) in the configuration center. Using the configuration center, you can adapt settings for the
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 9
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
business content delivered by SAP and create new business content for BCV in a web-based user
interface.
Effects on Existing Data
You can access the configuration center from the SAP Enterprise Portal or from SAP NetWeaver
Business Client (NWBC). The configuration offers a central point of access for all the transactions
necessary to configure and execute BCV. In addition, you can test BCV objects for consistency here, as
well as test your configuration settings.
The following transactions are available from the configuration center:
Configuration Activities
- Define Search Connectors
- Define BCV Queries
- Define Query Views
- Define Dashboards
- Define Overviews
- Define Query View Hierarchies
- Define Meanings
- Define User Groups
- Define Launchpads
Administrative Activities
- Display BCV Query Statistics
- Display Search Connector Statistics
- Perform Consistency Check
- Perform Authorization Check
- Display Where-Used List of User Group in ACL
Additional Functions
- Drill-Down
- Personalization
- Snapshots
- Printing
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 10
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Effects on Customizing
Some of the transactions in the configuration center are accessible from Customizing as well. You make
the Customizing settings for this function in Customizing for Cross-Application Components , under
Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications -> Business Context Viewer, in the following
Customizing activities:
- User Interface -> Define Query Views
- User Interface -> Define Dashboards
- User Interface ->Define Query View Hierarchies
- User Interface -> Define Overview
- User Interface ->Define Subject Groups
- User Interface -> Perform Authorization Checks
- User Interface -> Display Where-Used List of User Group in ACL
- Query Management -> Define BCV Queries
- Query Management -> Display Query Statistics
- Query Management -> Test BCV Queries
- Query Management -> Maintain Query Dispatcher
- Query Management -> Maintain Query Cache
- Query Management -> Delete Query Cache
- Search Integration -> Define Search Connectors
- Search Integration -> Display Search Connector Statistics
- Search Integration -> Test Search Connectors
- Foundation, Monitoring -> Define Meanings
- Foundation, Monitoring -> Define Context Key
- Foundation, Monitoring -> Migrate Data from PCV to BCV
- Maintenance -> Define Search Technology
- Maintenance -> Define Max. Number of Hits Received from Data Provision Technologies
- Maintenance -> Define Printing Parameters
- Maintenance -> Define Snapshot Parameters
- Maintenance -> Delete Snapshots
- Maintenance -> Perform Consistency Check
See also
SAP Library for SAP ERP on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/erp -> SAP ERP Enhancement
Packages -> ERP Central Component Enhancement Package 5 -> Processes and Tools for
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 11
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Enterprise Applications (CA-EPT) -> Business Context Viewer.
Release note /BCV/MAIN: Business Function FND, Business Context Viewer Main
1.2.6.2 /BCV/MAIN: Technical Features (New)
Use
As of SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702), Business Context Viewer (BCV) comes
with the following technical features:
New user interface functionalities to show and analyze business content
- The configuration center is a Web Dynpro-based application that serves as a central point of entry
for configuring and executing BCV. Configuration of BCV objects is simplified.
- The side panel is improved, setting up of dashboards, query views, favorites is easier and more
interactive.
- Business Context Viewer (BCV) displays information in the form of tables, graphics, pictures, or
charts. You can configure the settings of charts and tables, print them, add them to your favorites
and choose between different color palettes to display information in.
- Enhanced drill-down capabilities to call ABAP transactions and reports is available in BCV. You
can execute a drill-down from table cells and chart data points. The system opens the transaction or
report the drill-down calls in its own session. Data from the context is filled automatically as input
for the report.
- You can create snapshots of your query views.
Data provisioning and query handling functionalities
- BCV provides search connectors for Web Services, Classic InfoSets, SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence, SAP Workflows, Search Engine Service, Enterprise Search, BAPIs.
- Joining of queries based on two search connectors is possible.
- You can group BCV objects, which allows better sorting in the user interface.
- Caching of data improves performance.
Unit of measure and currency conversion
In BCV, you can specify a reference unit of currency or unit of measure to which the system converts all
currencies and measurements returned by a single data source.
Personalization and configuration of public or private settings
- With BCV's private settings, power users can create their own (private) content, while
personalization allows end users to save their personalized settings.
- The Overviews tab page of the side panel can be configured based on roles.
Integration of Xcelsius Dashboards
It is possible to integrate Business Objects Xcelsius dashboards into BCV without using any code.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 12
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Flexible Authorization Concept
Authorizations in BCV are based on roles, authorization objects, and NetWeaver access control lists,
which provide a flexible authorization concept.
Effects on Customizing
You make the Customizing settings for this function in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
-> Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications -> Business Context Viewer in the following
Customizing activities:
- User Interface -> Define Groupings
- User Interface -> Define Printing Parameters
- User Interface -> BAdI: Filtering Drill-Down Options
- Foundation, Monitoring -> BAdI: Unit Conversion
- Foundation, Monitoring -> BAdI: Currency Conversion
See also
SAP Library for SAP ERP on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/erp -> SAP ERP Enhancement
Packages -> ERP Central Component Enhancement Package 5 -> Processes and Tools for
Enterprise Applications (CA-EPT) -> Business Context Viewer.
Release note /BCV/MAIN: Business Function FND, Business Context Viewer Main
1.2.6.3 /BCV/MAIN: Authorizations (New)
Use
As of SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702), Business Context Viewer (BCV) has
the following features in authorization:
- Three PFCG roles are available for the following purposes:
- External users (users from a demilitarized zone (DMZ) system)
- BCV users
- BCV administrators
- The system checks the user's authorization to display, edit or execute the following authorization
objects, taking into consideration, not only the objects, but their context keys as well:
- Query View Hierarchy
- Overview
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 13
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Dashboard
- Query View
- Query
- Search Connector
- The system organizes authorizations into access control lists (ACLs). This allows for an easy
assignment of users to different levels of authorization.
- Two Portal roles are available to grant or deny access to the configuration center together with the
PFCG roles and access control lists:
- BCV User (com.sap.pct.bs_fnd.BCV_USR)
- BCV Administrator (com.sap.pct.bs_fnd.BCV_ADMIN)
Effects on Customizing
You make the Customizing settings for this function in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
-> Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications -> Business Context Viewer in the following
activities:
- User Interface -> Display Where-Used List of User Group in ACL
- User Interface -> Perform Authorization Checks
- User Interface -> BAdI: Definition of the Priority of Authorization Checks
See also
SAP Library for SAP ERP on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/erp -> SAP ERP Enhancement
Packages -> ERP Central Component Enhancement Package 5 -> Processes and Tools for
Enterprise Applications (CA-EPT) -> Business Context Viewer.
Release note /BCV/MAIN: Business Function FND, Business Context Viewer Main
1.2.6.4 /BCV/MAIN: Business Function FND, Business Context Viewer Main
Application (New)
Use
As of SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702), the business function FND, Business
Context Viewer Main Application (/BCV/MAIN) is available. With this business function you can get
business data from different data providers, tailored to your business and analytical needs. Business
Context Viewer (BCV) provides business context-related information presented in the form of a chart,
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 14
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
graphic, picture, or a table. This information is provided in the side panel attached to the business
application using BCV. You can create personalized analytics and reports, which improve the
effectiveness of decision making within the business process.
This business function provides the main functionality for BCV, the configuration center and its
framework. You can use the configuration center to create, edit and execute objects used in BCV; search
connectors, BCV queries, query views, overviews, query view hierarchies and dashboards.
As of this business function, the following features are available in Business Context Viewer:
- Configuration center to configure and create business content
- New technical features
- Flexible authorization concept
For more information, see the following release notes:
- /BCV/MAIN: Configuration Center (New)
- /BCV/MAIN: Technical Features (New)
- /BCV/MAIN: Authorizations (New)
See also
SAP Library for SAP ERP on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/erp -> SAP ERP Enhancement
Packages -> ERP Central Component Enhancement Package 5 -> Business Functions (SAP
Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0) -> Business Functions in SAP Business Suite
Foundation -> FND, Business Context Viewer Main Application.
1.2.7 CA-EPT-BOF Business Object Processing Framework
1.2.7.1 FPM BOPF Integration (New)
Use
FPM BOPF Integration (FBI) provides configurable integration of Floor Plan Manager (FPM) and
Business Objects Processing Framework (BOPF)-based business objects (BO). Generic FPM
Application Feeder classes and relevant application configuration are provided in order to consume
services of business objects modeled in BOPF. Thus, BOPF business object services can be consumed
seamlessly in a modification-free UI environment.
The following enhancements are available in this release:
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 15
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- POWL BOPF Integration (PBI) provides configurable integration between Personal Object Worklist
(POWL) and BOPF-based business objects.
- FBI View is a design time object that helps represent a join of application data between related BO
nodes. This helps convenient presentation of application data in Graphical User Interface Building
Blocks (GUIBBs). FBI View primarily represents application data of a given BO node. Optionally,
additional data can be merged from related BO nodes (database such as join) for convenient
presentation of data.
- Intra-BO associations, that is to say, associations between nodes of the same business object, are
respected in FBI. It is possible to create, change, or display data from two different nodes of the
same BO within the same GUIBB. This can be achieved using the FBI View.
- Cross-BO associations, that is to say, associations between nodes of different business objects, are
respected in FBI. It is possible to change or display data from two different nodes of the related BOs
within the same GUIBB. This can be achieved using the FBI View.
Note that a dedicated user action is required for creation of data in the case of cross-BO associations
within the same GUIBB.
- FBI supports GUIBBs for the following functions or roles:
- Alternative Key # Alternative keys modeled on the BO can be incorporated in an FBI
application using this GUIBB (instance identification).
- Action Parameters # Actions modeled on the nodes of BO can be incorporated in an FBI
application using this GUIBB.
- Form
- List
- It is possible to integrate free style UIBBs within an FBI application.
- FBI supports all BOPF actions, that is to say, actions modeled on the BO nodes.
- FBI also supports non-BOPF actions, that is to say, UI-specific actions that are not modeled on the
BO nodes.
- Dialogs: It is possible to configure dialogs against non-BOPF actions used in forms and lists.
- Navigation: It is possible to configure navigations (applications in a separate window) against
non-BOPF actions used in forms and lists.
Note that navigation is possible only in NetWeaver Business Client (NWBC) or Portal
environment.
- It is possible to configure Identification Region (IDR) of the FBI application. The following areas of
IDR can be configured:
- Title bar
- Ticket area
- Item area
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 16
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
1.2.8 CA-EPT-IDM Identity Management: Business Suite Processes
1.2.8.1 FND_IDM_1: SAP SNC Integration with SAP NW Identity Mgmt (New)
Use
In SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0 and in SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP
NetWeaver 7.0 with a licensed SAP NetWeaver Identity Management 7.0, you were able to create users
and assign authorizations centrally in a dedicated SAP NetWeaver Identity Management system. As of
SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702), as of SAP NetWeaver Identity Management
7.1, and as of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP SNC 7.0, business function Supply Network
Collaboration 1 (SCM_SNC_GEN_1), a new integration scenario with SAP SNC and SAP NetWeaver
Identity Management is available. It is now possible to create or change a user in SAP SNC first and then
distribute the user across a system landscape through SAP NetWeaver Identity Management.
The integration of SAP SNC with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management 7.1 allows you to perform a
stricter governance, risk, and compliance management than before, for example:
- Authorization requests can be validated in a central system.
- In critical cases, SAP NetWeaver Identity Management can trigger workflows before it grants
authorizations automatically.
With the integration of SAP SNC with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management 7.1, the following activities
of a user administrator in partner user management for SAP SNC can be transferred as requests to SAP
NetWeaver Identity Management:
- Create user account
- Change user account
- Lock user account
- Unlock user account
- Change role assignment (with roles created in the Role Maintenance (PFCG) transaction)
- Reset password
SAP NetWeaver Identity Management then executes the requests and distributes the new or changed data
to SAP SNC and other systems of the system landscape.
See also
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 17
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
For more information, see the following documentation:
- Release note SCM_SNC_GEN_1: User Administration (Enhanced) in SAP Enhancement
Package 1 for SAP SNC 7.0
- SAP Library for SAP Enhancement Package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration 7.0 on SAP
Help Portal at http://help.sap.com under Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications (CA-EPT) -> User Management and Distribution with SAP NetWeaver Identity
Management -> Identity Management for SAP Supply Network Collaboration
1.2.8.2 FND_IDM_1: SAP CRM Integration with SAP NW Identity Mgmt (New)
Use
As of SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702), as of SAP NetWeaver Identity
Management 7.1, and as of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Customer Relationship Management
(SAP CRM) 7.0, business function FND_IDM_1, a new integration scenario with SAP CRM and SAP
NetWeaver Identity Management is available.
You can now manage user accounts for contacts and partner contacts in SAP CRM using SAP
NetWeaver Identity Management. You can trigger the creation or change of user account data, including
roles and authorizations, in SAP CRM. SAP NetWeaver Identity Management manages the user account
information and distributes new or changed data to SAP CRM. You can also use SAP NetWeaver Identity
Management to distribute user account data to other systems as required, such as SAP Business
Information Warehouse or the Enterprise Portal.
With the integration of SAP CRM with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management 7.1, you can do the
following in SAP CRM:
- Create user account
You can create a user account for a contact with the relevant information and business partner (BP)
roles. The contact receives an email notification with the appropriate information to log on to SAP
CRM.
- Change user account
You can change the user account data of a contact at any time, for example, e-mail address,
assignment of BP roles, or name data.
- Lock or unlock user account
You can lock a user account so the contact cannot use it. You can subsequently unlock the account
at a later time.
- Reset user account password
You can reset the password for a user account at the request of a contact.
- Remove user account
You can deactivate a user account for a contact, or you can request an administrator of SAP
NetWeaver Identity Management to deactivate the account. The account is deleted in SAP CRM.
Effects on Existing Data
The WebClient UI has been enhanced with a Users assignment block in the applications for Partner
Contacts, Accounts, Contacts, and Employees. Aside from the Employees application, this
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 18
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
assignment block allows you to create or change user accounts.
Note: You must activate the Identity Management integration in order to make use of the new functions
for SAP NetWeaver Identity Management 7.1 on the WebClient UI.
See also
For more information, see the business function release noteFND_IDM_1: FND, Integration with SAP
NW Identity Mgmt (New)
1.2.8.3 FND_IDM_1: FND, SAP SLcM Integration with SAP NW Identity Mgmt
(New)
Use
As of SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702), as of SAP NetWeaver Identity
Management 7.1, and as of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0, Industry Extension Public
Services (IS-PS-CA 605), business function FND, Integration with SAP NW IDM 7.1 (FND_IDM_1),
a new integration scenario for SAP Student Lifecycle Management and SAP NetWeaver Identity
Management is available.
You can now manage student users in SAP Student Lifecycle Management, using SAP NetWeaver
Identity Management.
You can create identities for students in the Identity Management system. These identities can be used to
create users for students in the SAP Student Lifecycle Management system and in the SAP portal. You
can update, lock, and delete the student identities from the Student Lifecycle Management system.
From a single Identity Management system, you can manage student users and roles in multiple systems.
You can also automate the change of roles of students based on various student attributes, such as their
admission status, graduation status, and so on.
Effects on Existing Data
The SAP Student Lifecycle Management system must be connected to the Identity Management system,
and you must run the initial load job in the Identity Management system. The initial load job creates
identities for the existing student users from SAP Student Lifecycle Management.
When you request a user in the SAP Student Lifecycle Management system, an identity is requested in
the Identity Management system. Based on the role assigned for the identity in Identity Management, a
user maintained in transaction SU01 with relevant user roles maintained in transaction PFCG is
provisioned in the SAP Student Lifecycle Management system and portal roles with relevant PCD
(portal) roles are provisioned in the portal system.
When you request a student user in SAP Student Lifecycle Management, the system requests a student
identity in Identity Management and the users maintained in transaction SU01 are not created at that
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 19
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
time. You trigger creation of SU01 users from the Identity Management system.
Note: We do not recommend maintenance of student users using SU01.
Effects on System Administration
You must provide the technical details about the RFC destination to connect the SAP Student Lifecycle
Management system to the Identity Management system. Customers must activate the Identity
Management integration.
See also
For more information, see the business function release notes for FND_IDM_1: FND, Integration with
SAP NW Identity Mgmt (New)
For more information on SAP Netweaver Identity Management, see SAP Help Portal at
help.sap.com -> SAP NetWeaver -> SAP Netweaver Identity Management 7.0
1.2.8.4 IDM_1: FND, SAP SRM Integration with SAP NW Identity Mgmt (New)
Use
Provisioning of Employees:
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supplier Relationship Management 7.0 (SAP SRM 7.0) user
management, user creation and role assignment can be performed automatically. SAP NW Identity
Management provides the user account for a specific employee and the user account will automatically be
assigned to this employee. Previously these processes had to be done manually by the system
administrator.
Allowing automatic provisioning enables efficient and secure management of users and authorizations in
SAP and non-SAP landscapes and increase administrative efficiency for IDM-related tasks, and help
customers to fulfill legal requirements, security reviews, and audits.
IDM is optional for SRM processes.
User accounts can be provisioned as follows:
- Provisioning of user accounts for employees from the IDM system to the SAP SRM system in case
that HCM is the data source for employees.
Provisioning of Contact Persons for Suppliers & Bidders
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supplier Relationship Management 7.0 (SAP SRM 7.0), SAP
enhancement package 1 for SAP SRM 7.0 you have the option to request user accounts for contact
persons in SAP NW Identity Management. By assigning an IDM business role with SRM-specific PFCG
roles the user account for the corresponding contact person is provided and the user account is
automatically assigned to this contact person.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 20
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
SRM provides external partner information to IDM using SRM Web Dynpro maintenance screens.
External business partner information (contact person related information for bidder / supplier) is
provided from the SAP SRM system to the IDM system by using SRM Web Dynpro maintenance
screens. External business partner information is provided by sending a request for a user account from
SAP SRM to IDM. IDM sends a user account to SRM and the user account is assigned to the
corresponding business partner.
You can use SAP NetWeaver Identity Management as an access point for identities, which are not
employees, but rather persons associated with external business partners of type "Bidder" and "Supplier",
within the User Management and Organizational Management processes in SAP SRM.
1.2.9 CA-EPT-IBO Suite Inbox
1.2.9.1 Inbox (Enhanced)
Use
As of SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702), the inbox has been enhanced with the
following features:
- The inbox enables you to select multiple lines of the worklist and perform actions on all selected
lines at once.
- You can customize whether the task details area should be displayed below the worklist or not.
- The inbox supports the execution of decision tasks to process a user decision. User decision is a step
type of SAP Business Workflow. When choosing a decision task in the inbox, a popup displays all
related decision options.
- You can customize the way in which the system refreshes the worklist after an action has been
performed. The following possibilities are available:
- Refresh of complete list: The system refreshes the complete worklist.
- Removal of work item from worklist: When a work item has been processed, the system
removes it immediately from the worklist. Note, however, that the work item can reappear in
the worklist, for example, if an error occurs in the approval process or if the work item has not
been completed.
- No Refresh: The worklist is not refreshed after an action has been performed.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 21
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- In the personal object worklist (POWL), you can create a worklist for work items with a specific
task ID. You do so by defining a query using the task ID as your selection criterion.
Effects on Customizing
The following Customizing activities are relevant in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
under Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications --> Inbox:
- Define Tasks and Actions
- Hide Task Details Area
- Assign Task IDs to POWL Types
1.2.10 CA-EPT-NAV Object Navigator
1.2.10.1 Object Naviagtor (enhanced)
Use
As of SAP Business Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702)
1.3 CA-FS Financial Services
1.3.1 CA-FS-BP Business Partner Enhancements for Financial Service
1.3.1.1 PSM_GEN_BUDPER_2: Using Budget Period in HCM SOA Services
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 22
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
(New)
Use
If the PSM, Budget Period 2 (PSM_GEN_BUDPER_2) business function is activated, then the Budget
Period element will become available in the following service operations:
- Human Capital Master Data Management
- Cancel Accounting Coding Block Distribution Rule
- Find Accounting Coding Block Distribution Rule By Employee
- Create Accounting Coding Block Distribution Rule
- Update Accounting Coding Block Distribution Rule
- Time & Labor Management (Employee Time Sheet)
- Change Time Sheet
- Complete Employee Time Sheet
- Find Employee Time Sheet By Employee
- Check Change Time Sheet
- Time & Labor Management (Employee Time)
- Find Times For Employee Time Sheet By Elements
- Read Employee Time By Employee
- Time & Labor Management (Employee Time Agreement)
- Create Time Recording Completion Rule
- Read Time Recording Completion Rule
- Time & Labor Management (Employee Time Sheet Configuration)
- Read Employee Time Sheet Configuration
1.3.1.2 PSM_GEN_BUDPER_2: Business Function PSM, Budget Period 2 (new)
Use
As of SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702), business function PSM, Budget
Period 2 (PSM_GEN_BUDPER_2) is available.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 23
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Budget Period, a new acocunt assignment element, is availabe in further functions. The budget period
always exists in association with one or more funds.
For more information, see the following release notes:
- Financial and budgetary accounting using budget period in Travel Management
- Financial and budgetary accounting using budget period in HCM SOA
- Financial and budgetary accounting using budget period in Controlling (CO)
Note
The functions of this new business function are available if you are using SAP enhancement package 5
for SAP ERP 6.0.
See also
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP ERP on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/erp ->
SAP ERP Enhancement Packages -> ERP Central Component Enhancement Package 5 ->
Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications (CA-EPT) -> Budget Period.
1.3.2 CA-FS-ECH Error and Conflict Handler
1.3.2.1 Error and Conflict Handler (New)
Use
As of SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702), the following new functions are
available:
- You use your own settings to overwrite the settings for the standard business processes in FEH.
- You can define your own FEH business processes for the processes in Postprocessing Office.
- You can register for FEH-specific enterprise services.
- Usability and UI improvements for Payload Editor are available.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 24
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Effects on Customizing
Make the following settings in Customizing:
- Define Business Processes
- Define Business Processes for Postprocessing Office
- Assign Caller to a Business Process
See also
For more information, see SAP Library under Error and Conflict Handler (CA-FS-ECH).
1.4 CA-GTF General Application Functions
1.4.1 CA-GTF-PCF People Centric UI Framework
1.4.1.1 FND_SMB_UIE: SAP BP for UI Enhancement
Use
As of SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702), the business function SAP BP for UI
Enhancement is available. With this business function, the following new functionality is provided for
using and creating user interfaces for Best Practices with Web Dynpro ABAP:
- New CHIP categories for use within Page Builder
- Dashboard CHIPs
A new CHIP category that enables the creation of CHIPs that display analytics dashboards
- Lookup CHIPs
A new CHIP category that enables the creation of CHIPs for search fields that call transactions
to show details of a specific item.
- POWL CHIPs
A new CHIP category that enables the display of personal object worklist objects, allowing
detailed analysis of a wide selection of data.
Alongside these new objects, a set of Best Practices scenarios are delivered as Page Builder pages. These
are intended as templates to demonstrate how pages can be built using the Web Dynpro ABAP Page
Builder together with the new functionality enabled by this business functi on.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 25
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
See also
For more general information on working with Page Builder, and on creating pages, see the SAP Library
for SAP NetWeaver under Web Dynpro ABAP > Wb Dynpro ABAP: Deveopment in Detail > Advanced
Concepts > Web Dynpro ABAP Page Builder.
1.4.2 CA-GTF-VBZ Visual Business
1.4.2.1 FND_VISUAL_BUSINESS: Business Function Visual Business (New)
Use
As of SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702), the business function Visual Business
(FND_VISUAL_BUSINESS) is available. With this business function, you can take advantage of SAP
Visual Business applications that visualize data from SAP and external data sources on a single screen.
Visual Business applications not only combine different types of content, but also include interactive
graphics that visualize and combine enterprise data with geographical or three-dimensional real-world
scenes. SAP applications integrate Visual Business applications to depict their business processes
visually.
You can use the business function to configure Visual Business applications. Once the applications are
configured, they can be executed within the integrating applications.
Effects on System Administration
Authorization
You use the following authorization object to control the authorizations for SAP Visual Business:
- Visual Business Application VBC_APPL
You can define various authorizations for a Visual Business application such as authorization for
creating, changing, displaying or deleting as well as for administering an application.
SAP Visual Business uses two specific roles for which default authorizations are provided:
- Visual Business administrator
- Visual Business end user
Front-End Installation
To run SAP Visual Business you must install the front-end component of the solution on each client
computer. You can download the front-end component from the Downloads area of the SAP Service
Marketplace (http://service.sap.com/support) to your installation server and distribute it to the single
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 26
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
client computers.
Effects on Customizing
You make the Customizing settings for this function in Customizing for Cross-Application
Components under Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications -> Visual Business, in the
following Customizing activities:
- Maintain Default Proxy Settings
- Assign Map Products to Visual Business Applications
See also
For general information on SAP Visual Business see:
SAP Library at http://help.sap.com -> SAP Business Suite -> Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications (CA-EPT) -> SAP Visual Business
For more information about the business function FND_VISUAL_BUSINESS see:
SAP Library at http://help.sap.com -> SAP Business Suite -> SAP Business Suite -
Cross-Application Business Functions -> Business Functions (SAP Business Suite Foundation
7.02) -> Business Functions in SAP Business Suite -> FND, Visual Business
1.5 CA-HR Cross-Application Objects in HR
1.5.1 HCM, Cross Analytics
Use
As of SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702), the business function HCM, Cross
Analytics is available for the Human Capital Management (HCM) area. This business function does not
activate any functions, rather it is for information purposes only. You can use the new functions to which
this business function refers to perform cross analyses and benchmarking for the HCM processes for
Personnel Administration and Talent Management, for Compensation, and all of your employees#
training activities.
Note
The complete BI Content functions on which this business function is based are only available if
you implement SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0, as well as SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI
Content Add-On 5 and Extension for SAP NetWeaver 7.02 BI Content Add-On. Additionally, you
must have activated the following business functions:
- HCM, Core Processes in Talent Management 02 (HCM_TMC_CI_2)
- HCM, Enterprise Compensation Management 02 (HCM_ECM_CI_2)
- HCM, Learning Solution 03 (HCM_LSO_CI_3)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 27
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
For more information about these business functions, see the relevant release note and business
function description.
You can use the tools of SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse and the dashboards of SAP
BusinessObjects Xcelsius Enterprise to analyze these processes:
- SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse provides you with flexible reporting, analysis, and planning
tools for data analysis and interpretation.
- Furthermore, Xcelsius dashboards enable you to display interactive analyses that are aesthetically
pleasing and clear. The following dashboards are available for this purpose:
- Succession Planning Monitor (0XC_TMC_MP01_D01)
- Talent Supply (0XC_TMC_MP02_D01)
- Utilization of Talents (0XC_TMC_MP01_D02)
- Human Capital Management Dashboard (0XC_PA_C01_D01)
- Potential and Performance Analysis (0XC_TMC_MP02_D02)
- Strengths and Risks in the Organization (0XC_STRENGTHS_RISKS)
- Skills and Competencies (0XC_SKILLS_COMPETENCIES)
- Learning Activities of Talents (0XC_LSO_MP03_D01)
- Learning Activities of the Organization (0XC_LSO_MP03_D02)
- Compensation Monitor (0XC_COMPENSATION_MONITOR)
Note
To display the Xcelsius dashboards provided, you require version 9 of the Adobe Flash Player. Also
note the license conditions for SAP BusinessObjects.
To create your own dashboards, you require SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius Enterprise 2008 (SP03
FP1). Note the corresponding license terms here.
The following system prerequisites also apply to Xcelsius dashboards:
- SAP NetWeaver 7.0 including enhancement package 2 (SP04)
- SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-On 5
- Extension for SAP NetWeaver 7.02 BI Content Add-On 5
See also
SAP Library for SAP ERP on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/erp -> SAP ERP
Enhancement Packages -> ERP Central Component Enhancement Package 5 -> Business
Functions -> Business Functions in SAP ERP -> Enterprise Business Functions -> Human
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 28
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Capital Management
SAP Library for SAP ERP on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/erp -> SAP ERP
Enhancement Packages -> ERP Central Component Enhancement Package 5 -> Processes
and Tools for Enterprise Applications (CA-EPT) -> Embedded Analytics
1.5.2 HCM_NWBC_ROLES: Business Function HCM, Roles for SAP NetWeaver
Business Client (New)
Use
As of SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702), the business function HCM, Roles for
SAP NetWeaver Business Client is available. This business function does not activate any functions,
rather it is for information purposes only. However, the roles Course Administrator and
Instructor/Tutor are an exception since you use this business function to activate them.
As of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0, you can use the following roles in SAP NetWeaver
Business Client (NWBC):
- Recruiter
- Recruiting Administrator
- HR Administrator
- Talent Management Specialist
- Course Administrator
- Instructor/Tutor
- Manager Self-Service
These roles contain only applications and services that are also contained in the corresponding roles
provided for SAP NetWeaver Portal. Note however, that the following roles provide less features than the
corresponding portal role:
- Manager Self-Service
- Instructor/Tutor
For more information about the features of these roles, see the application documentation for the relevant
role (see references under "See also").
Note
You have the new roles available only if you implement SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP
6.0.
To use all of the features of the roles, depending on the required role, you must activate the
following business functions:
- Recruiter: HCM, SAP E-Recruiting 4 (HCM_ERC_CI_4)
- Recruiting Administrator: HCM, SAP E-Recruiting 4 (HCM_ERC_CI_4)
- HR Administrator: HCM, Administrative Services 03 (HCM_ASR_CI_3)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 29
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Talent Management Specialist: HCM, Core Processes in Talent Management
(HCM_TMC_CI_1)
Note
If in the role Talent Management Specialist, you want to use the enhancements that are
available with the business function HCM, Core Processes in Talent Management 02
(HCM_TMC_CI_2) (for example, launchpad with access to BI Content and other reports,
enhancements, and usability improvements for the talent assessment and calibration grid), you
must also activate this business function.
- Course Administrator: HCM, Learning Solution 02 (HCM_LSO_CI_2)
Note
If you want to use the BI Content available in the launchpad in the Course Administrator
role, you must also activate the business function HCM, Learning Solution 03
(HCM_LSO_CI_3).
- Instructor/Tutor: HCM, Learning Solution 02 (HCM_LSO_CI_2)
- Manager Self-Service:
For services from E-Recruiting (PA-ER): HCM, SAP E-Recruiting 4 (HCM_ERC_CI_4)
For services from HR Administrative Services (PA-AS): HCM, Administrative Services
03 (HCM_ASR_CI_3)
For services from Talent Management (PA-TM): HCM, Core Processes in Talent
Management (HCM_TMC_CI_1)
For services from SAP Learning Solution (PE-LSO): HCM, Learning Solution 02
(HCM_LSO_CI_2)
For services from Enterprise Compensation Management (PA-EC): HCM, Enterprise
Compensation Management 02 (HCM_ECM_CI_2)
For services from Objective Setting and Appraisals (PA-PD-PM): CA, Appraisals,
Evaluations, and Surveys 01 (CA_HAP_CI_1), HCM, Performance Management 01
(HCM_OSA_CI_1), HCM, Performance Management 02 (HCM_OSA_CI_2)
For services from Personnel Cost Planning and Simulation (PA-CP): HCM, Personnel
Cost Planning and Simulation (HCM_HCP_CI_1)
For services for the administration of time and labor data: HCM, ESS with Web Dynpro
ABAP (HCM_ESS_WDA_1)
For the graphical display in services with organizational charts: HCM, PD UI Visualization
01 (HCM_PD_UI_1)
For more information about these business functions, see the relevant release note and business
function description.
With SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0, you can also use the Employee Self-Service
role in SAP NetWeaver Business Client. For more information, see the release note and business
function description for HCM, ESS on Web Dynpro ABAP (HCM_ESS_WDA_1).
The following roles use the inbox for work items, alerts, and notifications based on Web Dynpro for
ABAP, which is available as of SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.01 SP06:
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 30
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Recruiter
- HR Administrator
- Manager Self-Service
For more information, see the release note Inbox (New).
Effects on Existing Data
The following new objects are provided for the business function:
Composite and Single Roles in Role Maintenance (Transaction PFCG)
A composite role is available for each role. The composite role comprises one or more single roles with
the role menu and one or more single roles for authorization assignment. The single roles for
authorization assignment are not generally new. The single roles that are also available for the
authorizations for the relevant portal role are reused.
The following new and reused composite roles and single roles are available for the business function:
Software Component ERECRUIT 605
- Recruiter
- Composite role: SAP_RCF_RECRUITER_ERC_CI_4 (new)
- Single role for menu: SAP_RCF_RECRUITER_SR_ERC_CI_4 (new)
- Single role for authorization assignment: SAP_RCF_RECRUITER_ERC_CI_2 (reused)
- Recruiting Administrator
- Composite role: SAP_RCF_REC_ADMIN_ERC_CI_4 (new)
- Single role for menu: SAP_RCF_REC_ADMIN_SR_ERC_CI_4 (new)
- Single role for authorization assignment: SAP_RCF_REC_ADMIN_ERC_CI_2 (reused)
Software Component EA-HRGXX 605
- HR Administrator
- Composite role: SAP_ASR_HRADMIN_HCM_CI_3 (new)
- Single role for menu and authorization assignment: SAP_ASR_HRADMIN_SR_HCM_CI_3
(new)
- Talent Management Specialist
- Composite role: SAP_TAL_MGMT_SPEC_TMC_CI_2 (new)
- Single role for menu: SAP_TAL_MGMT_SPEC_SR_TMC_CI_2 (new)
- Single role for authorization assignment: SAP_TMC_TALENT_MANA_SPECIALIST
(reused)
- Course Administrator
- Composite role: SAP_COURSEADMIN_LSO_CI_2 (new)
- Single role for menu: SAP_COURSEADMIN_LSO_SR_CI_2 (new)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 31
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Single role for authorization assignment: SAP_HR_LSO_TRAININGADMIN (reused)
- Instructor/Tutor
- Composite role: SAP_INST_TUT_LSO_CI_1 (new)
- Single role for menu: SAP_INST_TUT_LSO_SR_CI_1 (new)
- Single role for authorization assignment: SAP_HR_LSO_INSTRUCTOR (reused)
- Manager Self-Service
- Composite role: SAP_MANAGER_MSS_NWBC (new)
- Single roles for menu: SAP_MANAGER_MSS_SR_NWBC,
SAP_MANAGER_MSS_OTH_NWBC, SAP_TIME_MGR_XX_ESS_WDA_1 (new)
- Single role for menu and authorization assignment: SAP_TIME_MGR_XX_ESS_WDA_1
(new)
- Single roles for authorization assignment: SAP_ASR_MANAGER,
SAP_HR_LSO_HR-MANAGER, SAP_HR_LSO_MANAGER, SAP_RCF_MANAGER,
SAP_TMC_MANAGER (reused)
Business Objects
New business objects were created for the roles that use object-based navigation (OBN). These business
objects each correspond to a business object that was used for object-based navigation within the portal
roles. Object-based navigation is implemented for indirect navigation in SAP NetWeaver Business Client.
This is a role-based navigation technology that is controlled using business objects from the Business
Object Repository (BOR) and activities.
The following new business objects are available for the business function:
Software Component ERECRUIT 605
- Recruiter and Recruiting Administrator
- activity (object type HRACTV_NAV)
- application_group (object type HRAPPG_NAV)
- application (object type HRAPPL_NAV)
- attachment (object type HRATCH_NAV)
- candidate (object type HRCAND_NAV)
- candidacy (object type HRCDCY_NAV)
- HRREC_WL (object type HRREC_WL)
- job (object type HRJOB_NAV)
- organizationalunit (object type HRORGU_NAV)
- position (object type HRPOSI_NAV)
- posting (object type HRPOST_NAV)
- process_template (object type HRPROC_NAV)
- publication (object type HRPUBL_NAV)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 32
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- questionnaire (object type HRQSNR_NAV)
- requisition (object type HRREQU_NAV)
- support_group (object type HRSUPG_NAV)
- talent_group (object type HRTALG_NAV)
Software Component EA-HRGXX 605
- Talent Management Specialist
- talentReviewMeeting (object type HRTRM_NAV)
- Course Administrator and Instructor/Tutor
- course_group (object type HRCGRP_NAV)
- correspondence (object type HRCORR_NAV)
- course (object type HRCOUR_NAV)
- course_type (object type HRCTYP_NAV)
- participant (object type HRPART_NAV)
- room (object type HRROOM_NAV)
- Manager Self-Service
- MANAGERWORKLIST (object type MSS_WL)
Note
The roles of this business function also use the business object employee (object type
HREMP_NAV) that is provided as part of Employee Self-Service. For more information, see the
release note for the business function HCM, ESS on Web Dynpro ABAP (HCM_ESS_WDA_1).
Effects on Customizing
In the standard SAP system, an entry for object-based navigation is defined for each role in Launchpad
Customizing (transaction LPD_CUST). The entries are as follows:
Role Name Role Instance
Recruiter ERC OBN_NAVIGATION
Recruiting Administrator ERC OBN_NAVIGATION
HR Administrator HRADM_NAV OBN
Talent Management Specialist HRTMS_NAV OBN
Course Administrator HRCA_NAV OBN
Instructor/Tutor HRIT_NAV OBN
Manager Self-Service MSS NAV
Note
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 33
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
A further entry with a different instance is additionally defined for the roles that contain the
launchpad and use it to call reports or BI Content, for example. These are the same entries that are
also used for the launchpad within the relevant portal role.
Transaction LPD_CUST is in Customizing for the application:
- Recruiter and Recruiting Administrator: Customizing for SAP E-Recruiting
- HR Administrator: Customizing for Personnel Management -> HR Administrative Services
- Talent Management Specialist: Customizing for Talent Management and Talent Development
- Course Administrator and Instructor/Tutor: Customizing for Training and Event Management ->
SAP Learning Solution
- Manager Self-Service: Customizing for Personnel Management -> Manager Self-Service
Otherwise, the services of the new roles use the same Customizing entries as the corresponding portal
roles. For more information about the Customizing settings required for each role, see the application
documentation (see references under "See also").
See also
Business Function Descriptions
SAP Library for SAP ERP under SAP Business Suite
- -> SAP Business Suite - Cross-Application Business Functions -> Business Functions (SAP
Business Suite Foundation 7.02) -> Business Functions for SAP ERP in SAP Business
Suite Foundation
- -> SAP ERP -> Business Functions (SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0) ->
Enterprise Business Functions -> Human Capital Management
Application Documentation
SAP Library for SAP ERP under SAP Business Suite -> SAP ERP -> Cross-Application Functions
in SAP ERP -> Roles -> Roles in SAP NetWeaver Business Client
1.6 CA-MDG Master Data Governance
1.6.1 CA-MDG-AF Application Framework
1.6.1.1 MDG_FOUNDATION: Authorizations (New)
Use
As of SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702), the following features are available:
Authorization Groups
The following is now available for customizing Master Data Governance:
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 34
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- USMA
Authorization group related to the views for managing authorizations
- USMD
Authorization group for all other, not authorization-relevant views
Authorization Objects
The following new features are available:
- USMD_UI2 for single processing
For entity types with storage and use type 1, use this authorization object only. For single
processing, it replaces the authorization object USMD_UI previously used in Financial Master
Data Management.
- USMD_MDAT for processing master data
You can use this authorization object to grant authorizations for entity types with the storage and
use type 4.
- USMD_MDATH for processing hierarchies
In addition to the authorizations for main nodes of a hierarchy, you now can also grant
authorizations for subtrees of the hierarchy.
Effects on Customizing
You configure this function in Customizing for Data Modeling. For more information, see the
Implementation Guide under Cross-Application Components -> Processes and Tools for
Enterprise Applications -> General Settings -> Master Data Governance -> Data Modeling ->
Define Authorization Relevance per Entity Type .
1.6.1.2 MDG_FOUNDATION: Master Data Change Process (New)
Use
As of SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702), the change process for master data
offers the following features:
- Change request with temporary persistence in the staging area and approval
All master data changes are assigned to a change request and are linked to an approval. The system
activates master data changes only after the change request is approved.
- Rule-based workflow
You can control workflows using rules. These rules use either the method of a Business Add-In
(BAdI) or a business rule of Business Rule Framework plus (BRFplus).
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 35
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Collective processing and hierarchy maintenance
You can perform mass processing for master data changes. You can simultaneously change multiple
master data entities (for example, suppliers), or you can change the hierarchy arrangement of master
data entities when you go to the hierarchy view. You can manage hierarchy versions.
- Evaluation
You can evaluate change requests for master data records according to various criteria (for example,
based on a specific period or status).
1.6.1.3 MDG_FOUNDATION: Data Model and UI Configuration (New)
Use
As of SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702), the following modeling features are
available for data models and the user interface:
Configuring the Data Model
SAP delivers different data models for Financials and for the business objects Supplier and Material.
You can modify these data models and, for example, configure business object types for these data
models. You also can create your own data models. Furthermore, you can create a hierarchy per entity
type (for example, for hierarchical evaluations of a financial statement version). For the data model, you
can define whether it should use a reuse active area.
Configuring the User Interface
You can tailor to your requirements all user interfaces of Single Processing that SAP delivers for the
master data entities. To do this, you use the Customizing activity UI Configuration. This is implemented
as a Web Dynpro application. UI configurations offer comprehensive options for designing the layout,
such as a screen layout with two columns. The UI configuration replaces the UI model previously used in
Financial Master Data Management.
Effects on Customizing
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 36
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
UI Modeling
In Customizing for Master Data Governance, you can customize the following settings for this function
under General Settings -> UI Modeling:
- Edit UI Configuration
- BAdI: Adjust User Interface for Single Processing
Data Modeling
In Customizing for Master Data Governance, you must customize the following settings for this function
under General Settings -> Data Modeling:
- Edit Data Model
- Define Prefixes for Internal Key Assignment
- Create Authorizations for Data Model
See also
For more information, see the Application Help documentation under:
- Data Modeling
- Managing of UI Configurations
1.6.2 CA-MDG-DRF Data Replication Framework
1.6.2.1 CA_MDG_DRF: Data Replication Framework (New)
Use
As of Business Suite Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND_702), the Data Replication Framework (DRF)
supports the replication of master data in a corporate environment.
The following features are available:
- Replication
Use replication models that define the data to be replicated. Complete full replication or delta
replication either on-demand or at a scheduled time.
- Filtering
Manage data replication policies by creating and testing filters.
- Monitoring
Use a replication interface to verify that replication processes have worked.
- Data Integrity
You can implement key mapping and value mapping within the DRF to guarantee data integrity.
- Communication Channels
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 37
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Use SOA, iDOC, and RFC.
For supplier master data the data replication framework uses the below mentioned mediums of
communication, depending on the client system:
Client system Medium of communication
ERP <= 4.0 IDoc CREMAS
ERP > 4.0 and <= 4.6C IDoc CREMAS and ADRMAS
ERP >= 6.0 and < 6.05 IDoc CREMAS and ADRMAS (standard ERP
customer)
IDoc CREMDM (Initial Load)
IDoc BUPA_INBOUND_MAIN_SAVE and
BUPA_INBOUND_REL_SAVE (Industry customer
e.g., Fin Serv.)
ERP 6.05 and higher Services BusinessPartnerSuiteReplicateRequest,
BusinessPartnerRelationshipSuiteReplicateRequest
SRM < 7.02 IDoc BUPA_INBOUND_MAIN_SAVE and
BUPA_INBOUND_REL_SAVE
SRM >07.02 Services BusinessPartnerReplicateRequest,
BusinessPartnerRelationshipSuiteReplicateRequest
Non-SAP Services BusinessPartnerSuiteReplicateRequest,
BusinessPartnerRelationshipSuiteReplicateRequest
Effects on Customizing
You make the Customizing settings for this function in Customizing for Master Data Governance under
Cross-Application Components -> Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications -> Master
Data Governance -> General Settings -> Data Replication.
1.6.3 CA-MDG-DQ Data Quality
1.6.3.1 MDG_FOUNDATION: Enhancing Master Data Quality (New)
Use
As of Business Suite Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND_702), the following features are available for the
roles Master Data User and Master Data Specialist to increase the overall quality of master data records.
Automatic and Manual Check for Duplicates
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 38
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
You can check whether specific master data records or master data details already exist in the system.
The system automatically executes a duplicate check in the following situations:
- When a new data record is created
- When an existing data record is changed
You can also manually check for duplicates in the system before a master data record is created or
changed.
Address Validation and Enrichment
The optional integration with SAP BusinessObjects Data Quality Management enables you to not only
check entered addresses for validity against, for example, postal address directories, but also guides you
to a complete and well-formatted address. Alternatively, partner solutions can be integrated in case
specific requirements need to be covered.
Exact and Error-Tolerant Search
The system provides you with the following search options for finding specific master data records:
- An exact search based on exact values or value ranges.
- A fuzzy search that takes misspelled or similar values into account.
Effects on System Administration
In the Administration Cockpit (transaction ESH_COCKPIT) you have to create a search object connector
for the corresponding business object and configure it for indexing.
Effects on Customizing
You make the Customizing settings for this function in Customizing for Master Data Governance, Data
Quality (CA-MDG-DQ):
SAP Customizing Implementation Guide -> Cross-Application Components -> Processes and Tools for
Enterprise Applications -> Master Data Governance -> General Settings -> Data Quality and Search:
- Configure Duplicate Check for Entity Types
- Create Search Object Connector Template
- Assign Search Object Connector Templates to Object Types
- BAdI: Search for Data in Reuse Active Area
- BAdI: Access to Data in Reuse Active Area for Search Indexing
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 39
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
1.6.4 CA-MDG-KM Key Mapping
1.6.4.1 CA_MDG_KM: Key Mapping (New)
Use
As of Business Suite Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND_702) you can use key mapping.
You use key mapping to link the identifying keys of object instances that represent identical objects in
different systems. You can also maintain one or more keys in each system.
If within a given business process, object instances representing the same object must have different keys
in different systems, you need to implement key mapping in addition to some kind of replication
mechanism.
It is possible to create multiple system copies for key mapping.
Effects on Customizing
You make the Customizing settings for this function in Customizing for Master Data Governance
under Cross-Application Components -> Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications ->
Master Data Governance -> General Settings -> Key Mapping.
1.6.5 CA-MDG-ML Mass Load
1.6.5.1 MDG_FOUNDATION: Mass Data Load (New)
Use
As of SAP Business Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702), you can use the mass data load to upload
master data from decentralized systems into a master data governance hub. The mass data load allows
you to convert data into the required format for enterprise services according to the message types
defined in ESR.
Effects on Customizing
Define File Converter Type
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 40
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
BAdI: Filter-dependent BAdI to realize file converter
1.6.6 CA-MDG-RIF Replication Interface Framework
1.6.6.1 CA_SUPPLIER_SOA: Business Foundation for Services for Supplier
(new)
Use
As of SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702), the business function Business
Foundation for Services for Supplier (CA_SUPPLIER_SOA) is available.
If Business Foundation for Services for Supplier is activated, the BAdIs mentioned below are offered
to implement a customer specific mapping to override the standard mapping of the listed services.
Effects on Customizing
Set up Business Partner
Activate/Deactivate Business Partner Function Modules for Replication
BAdI: Business Partner Replication Request Inbound
BAdI: Business Partner Replication Request Outbound
BAdI: Business Partner Replication Confirmation Inbound
BAdI: BP Relationships Replication Request Inbound
BAdI: BP Relationships Replication Request Outbound
BAdI: BP Relationships Replication Confirmation Inbound
1.6.6.2 MDG_FOUNDATION: Master Data Governance, Generic Functions (New)
Use
As of SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702), the business function Master Data
Governance, Generic Functions (MDG_FOUNDATION) is available. Using this business function,
you can use the following basic functions:
- Central management of master data throughout your entire group
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 41
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Safeguarding of data quality
- Replication of master data to target systems
- Transparency of master data changes
For more information, see the following release notes:
- MDG_FOUNDATION: Master Data Change Process (New)
- MDG_FOUNDATION: Authorizations
- MDG_FOUNDATION: Data Model and UI Configuration
- MDG_FOUNDATION: Mass Data Load
- MDG_FOUNDATION: Data Replication Framework
- MDG_FOUNDATION: Key Mapping.
- MDG_FOUNDATION: Value Mapping
- MDG_FOUNDATION: Replication Interface Framework
- MDG_FOUNDATION: Enhancing Master Data Quality
Effects on Existing Data
See also
SAP Library for SAP ERP on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/erp -> SAP ERP Enhancement
Packages -> ERP Central Component Enhancement Package 5 -> SAP Business Suite -> SAP
Business Suite - Cross-Application Business Functions -> Business Functions (SAP Business
Suite Foundation 7.02) -> Business Functions in SAP Business Suite Foundation -> Business
Functions in SAP Business Suite -> Master Data Governance, Generic Functions
1.6.6.3 MDG_FOUNDATION: Replication Interface Framework (New)
Use
As of SAP Business Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702), you can use Replication Interface Framework
to generate interfaces for replicating your master data.
You can use Replication Interface Framework to create outbound interface models that contain entity
types and attributes from data models that you want to replicate from the Master Data Governance hub to
one or more target systems. Replication Interface Framework then generates the interfaces (RFC) that are
used to replicate the data.
You can use Replication Interface Framework to:
- Create new outbound interface models
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 42
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Display existing outbound interface models
- Display a list of all the outbound implementations where an interface model is used
- Delete outbound interface models
Effects on Customizing
You make the Customizing settings for this function in Customizing for Master Data Governance,
Replication Interface Framework (CA-MDG-RIF):
SAP Customizing Implementation Guide -> Cross-Application Components -> Processes and Tools for
Enterprise Applications -> Master Data Governance -> General Settings -> Data Replication:
Define Custom Settings for Data Replication
- Define Replication Models
Enhance Default Settings for Outbound Implementations:
- Define Filter Objects
- Assign Filter Objects to Business Objects
- Define Outbound Interface Models
- Define Outbound Implementations
1.6.7 CA-MDG-VM Value Mapping
1.6.7.1 CA_MDG_VM: Value Mapping (New)
Use
As of Business Suite Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND_702), Value Mapping supports the assignment of
IDs belonging to objects defined in Customizing (such as countries) to external code lists (for example,
ISO code lists). Value mapping is necessary in system landscapes in which the IDs of such objects differ.
We recommend using a central code list for each object type across the entire system landscape to reduce
the number of value assignments.
Value mapping supports:
- Maintenance of a code-mapping for a particular Global Data Type (GDT)
- Application-specific implementations, for example value mapping of Supplier data
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 43
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
The value mapping framework provides an API to read the value mapping values during the inbound and
outbound processing of data replication services.
Effects on Customizing
You make the Customizing settings for this function in Customizing for Master Data Governance
under Cross-Application Components -> Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications ->
Master Data Governance -> General Settings -> Value Mapping.
1.7 CA-MOB Mobile Business Management
1.7.1 CA-MOB-MIB Mobile Productivity Applications
1.7.1.1 FND_MOBILEINBOX_WF_1: BF FND, Workflow & Alert (Mobile) (New)
Use
As of Business Suite Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702), the business function FND, Workflow &
Alert (Mobile) is available. With this business function, users can react to workflow and alert messages
by performing the required activities directly from their smartphones.
The following functions are supported:
- SAP Business Workflow
Using this function, users can manage requests for approval from SAP Business Workflow on their
mobile devices. They can do the following:
- Approve or reject workflow items
- Receive notifications of missed workflow-related deadlines
- Alerts
Using this function, users can receive alerts from SAP Alert Management on their mobile devices.
They can do the following:
- Display alert messages
- Set alert messages to status "complete"
Prerequisite
You need to make the appropriate settings regarding roles and authorizations.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 44
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Effects on Customizing
The following activities are available for this function:
- Add comment to workflow item
- Get comment for workflow item
1.8 CA-SOA Enterprise SOA
1.8.1 FND_SOA_REUSE_1: Asynch. Point-to-Point Communication (New)
Use
As of SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702), you can trigger asynchronous enterprise
services through the Web service protocol without using a mediator (such as SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration). To do this, you need to use additional features that are provided by the reusable components
of SAP Business Suite:
- The Response Receiver Correlation Manager enables you to register an incoming request or
query. This registration can be picked up in the corresponding confirmation or response message to
control how the response message is routed.
- In-application sequencing ensures that incoming messages are processed in the correct sequence at
application level. Whenever a missing message is detected for a new message, the new message is
put into a waiting queue until the missing message arrives.
- Many point-to-point enabled enterprise services are assigned to service groups. You can use this
group definition to configure the services in the SOA Manager (transaction SOAMANAGER). A
new wrapper class for outgoing service calls bundles the logical ports generated through this group
configuration.
Effects on Customizing
You make the Customizing settings for this function in Customizing for Cross Application
Components ->Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications ->Enterprise Services ->
Point-to-Point Enablement for Asynchronous Enterprise Services.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 45
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- In the Customizing activity Activate Support f. Response Receiver Correlation and
In-Application Sequencing you activate support for these features at client level.
- In the Customizing activity Define Background RFC (bgRFC) Settings for In-Application
Sequencing you make the necessary settings for background remote function calls (bgRFC).
In addition, you need to set up an endpoint for a point-to-point enabled asynchronous enterprise service.
In another client of your ABAP system, you must also set up the corresponding logical port. You can
make these settings using transaction SOAMANAGER.
See also
SAP Library for SAP NetWeaver on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/netweaver -> SAP
NetWeaver 7.0 (2004s) -> SAP NetWeaver 7.0 including Enhancement Package 2. Search for
Working with the SOA Manager.
1.8.2 FND_SOA_REUSE_1: Business Function SOA Reuse Functions (New)
Use
As of SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702), the business function Improvements for
SOA Reuse Functions is available. With this business function, you can use the following
cross-application tool improvements that facilitate the use of services:
- SOA Mapping Tool
- Configurable mapping of external data descriptions to internal data descriptions
- Improved configuration user interface
- Where-used list
- Error Handling
- Configurable error categories
- New functions in the Error and Conflict Handler
- Point-to-Point Enablement for Asynchronous Enterprise Services
- Support of asynchronous point-to-point communication
For more information, see the following release notes:
- FND_SOA_REUSE_1: SOA Mapping Tool (New)
- FND_SOA_REUSE_1: Error Categorizer (New)
- FND_SOA_REUSE_1: Error and Conflict Handler (New)
- FND_SOA_REUSE_1: Asynchronous Point-to-Point Communication (New)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 46
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
See also
SAP Library for SAP ERP on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/erp -> SAP ERP Enhancement
Packages -> ERP Central Component Enhancement Package 5 -> Business Functions (SAP
Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0) -> Business Functions in SAP Business Suite
Foundation -> Business Functions in SAP Business Suite -> FND_SOA_REUSE_1:
Improvements for SOA Reuse Functions.
1.8.3 FND_SOA_REUSE_1: Error Categorizer (New)
Use
As of SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702), the Error Categorizer is available.
This function is available if you are using SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0.
With the Error Categorizer, you can categorize error messages that were displayed during the processing
of service operations. This enables you to override the existing fixed assignment of error categories to
error messages.
In the enhancement spot ES_BS_SOA_ERR_CAT, the Business Add-In (BAdI)
BSSOA_ERR_CAT_BADI is available. You can use this to change the results determined by the Error
Categorizer.
Effects on Existing Data
The error categorizer has no effect on existing data.
Effects on Data Transfer
The error categorizer has no effect on the data transfer.
Effects on System Administration
The error categorizer has no effect on the system administration.
Effects on Customizing
You can make the customizing settings for this function in Customizing for Cross-Application
Components under:
Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications -> Enterprise Services -> Error Categorizer ->
Synchronous Services Using the Error Categorizer
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 47
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications -> Enterprise Services -> Error Categorizer ->
Assign Error Categories to Messages
Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications -> Enterprise Services -> Error Categorizer ->
Assign Priority to Error Category
Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications -> Enterprise Services -> Error Categorizer ->
Assign Message Category Groups to Services
Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications -> Enterprise Services -> Error Categorizer ->
Assign Priority to Error Category per Service
Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications -> Enterprise Services -> Error Categorizer ->
BAdI: Change of Detected Error Category
See also
Release Information FND_SOA_REUSE_1: Business Function SOA Reuse Functions (New)
1.8.4 CA-SOA-SMT Service Mapping Tool
1.8.4.1 FND_SOA_REUSE_1: Service Mapping Tool (New)
Use
As of SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702) you can use the following features
which have been added to the configuration component:
- an external representation of a corresponding ABAP structure originating from a service interface
(generated proxy structure) can now be displayed on the configuration user interface
- the tree display of a structure (source or target) in the configuration user interface can be
alphabetically sorted by field name
- the assignment of a source field to the corresponding target field can be done by dragging and
dropping within the configuration user interface
- a report is provided delivering a where-used list of the relevant configuration entities (such as
Condition, Transformation, Conversion and Field-Check Class) for a given package group.
Effects on Customizing
You make the Customizing settings for this function in Customizing for SMT in Cross-Application
Components -> Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications -> Enterprise Services -> Develop
Enterprise Services -> Create and Edit Mappings.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 48
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
See also
SAP Library for SAP ERP on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/erp -> SAP ERP Enhancement
Packages -> ERP Central Component Enhancement Package 5 -> Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications -> Mappings for Enterprise Services.
SAP Library for SAP ERP on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/erp -> SAP ERP Enhancement
Packages -> ERP Central Component Enhancement Package 5 -> Business Functions (SAP
Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0) -> Business Functions in SAP Business Suite Foundation ->
FND_SOA_REUSE_1: Improvements for SOA Reuse Functions.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 49
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
2 SCM Supply Chain Management
2.1 FND_IDM_1: SAP SNC Integration with SAP NW Identity Mgmt
(New)
Use
In SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0 and in SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP
NetWeaver 7.0 with a licensed SAP NetWeaver Identity Management 7.0, you were able to create users
and assign authorizations centrally in a dedicated SAP NetWeaver Identity Management system. As of
SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702), as of SAP NetWeaver Identity Management
7.1, and as of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP SNC 7.0, business function Supply Network
Collaboration 1 (SCM_SNC_GEN_1), a new integration scenario with SAP SNC and SAP NetWeaver
Identity Management is available. It is now possible to create or change a user in SAP SNC first and then
distribute the user across a system landscape through SAP NetWeaver Identity Management.
The integration of SAP SNC with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management 7.1 allows you to perform a
stricter governance, risk, and compliance management than before, for example:
- Authorization requests can be validated in a central system.
- In critical cases, SAP NetWeaver Identity Management can trigger workflows before it grants
authorizations automatically.
With the integration of SAP SNC with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management 7.1, the following activities
of a user administrator in partner user management for SAP SNC can be transferred as requests to SAP
NetWeaver Identity Management:
- Create user account
- Change user account
- Lock user account
- Unlock user account
- Change role assignment (with roles created in the Role Maintenance (PFCG) transaction)
- Reset password
SAP NetWeaver Identity Management then executes the requests and distributes the new or changed data
to SAP SNC and other systems of the system landscape.
See also
For more information, see the following documentation:
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 50
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Release note SCM_SNC_GEN_1: User Administration (Enhanced) in SAP Enhancement
Package 1 for SAP SNC 7.0
- SAP Library for SAP Enhancement Package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration 7.0 on SAP
Help Portal at http://help.sap.com under Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications (CA-EPT) -> User Management and Distribution with SAP NetWeaver Identity
Management -> Identity Management for SAP Supply Network Collaboration
2.2 SCM-APO Advanced Planning and Optimization
2.2.1 SCM_APO_HIER_AGG_PLAN: Hierarchy-Based Aggregated Planning
(New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, you can use the
following enhancements regarding aggregated planning with time-dependent location product
hierarchies:
- Demand Planning (DP): During the release of forecast data from DP to Supply Network Planning
(SNP), the system disaggregates the forecast data from the header product level to the sub product
level taking into account the time-dependent quota arrangements of the sub products. The forecast
data can then be consumed by incoming sales orders either on header or sub product level.
- Capable-to-Match (CTM): If you use Enhanced Aggregated Planning in CTM, aggregation and
disaggregation are performed in two CTM runs. In the first CTM run, CTM aggregates the data on
header product level and performs the planning. Afterwards, you start a new CTM run that
disaggregates the planning result according to the time-dependent quota arrangements of the
time-dependent location product hierarchy to the individual sub products.
Effects on Existing Data
The user interfaces have been reworked in the following way:
- In the location product master maintenance on the Demand tab, the checkbox Aggregated
Forecast Consumption has been added.
- In the CTM profile on the Aggregation tab, the checkbox Enhanced Aggregated Planning has
been added.
- In the location product master maintenance on the SNP2 tab, the checkbox Aggr. CTM Planning
has been added.
Effects on Customizing
Select a time-dependent location product hierarchy for this process in Customizing for SAP SCM under
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 51
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Master Data -> Product -> Maintain Product-Relevant
Hierarchies and Hierarchy Structures.
If you want to select a time-dependent location product hierarchy for the consumption in SNP instead of
using the default time-dependent location product hierarchy, you can use the Business Add-In (BAdI)
BAdI: Hierarchy Change in Customizing for SAP SCM under Advanced Planning and Optimization
-> Supply Chain Planning -> Demand Planning -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) -> Release
SNP/DP.
See also
For more information, see the main release note for business function SCM-APO, Aggregated Planning
in DP, SNP and CTM.
2.2.2 SCM_APO_HIER_AGG_PLAN: Enhancements in Interactive SNP (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, you can display
pegging information in interactive Supply Network Planning (SNP). You can also choose between
disaggregation methods in interactive Supply Network Planning.
Effects on Existing Data
The following user interface has been changed:
- On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Supply
Network Planning -> Planning -> Interactive Supply Network Planning (all Books). If you
enter a value for the Distribution Receipt (Planned) key figure for your header product, and press
Enter, a new window opens with the following options for disaggregation:
- Quota
- BAdI
- Demand Quantity
- Receipt Quantity
- Do Not Show Again
- On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Supply
Network Planning -> Planning -> Interactive Supply Network Planning (all Books). If you
click on a key figure with your alternate mouse button and choose Display pegging information,
the pegging relationships are shown in a separate screen area.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 52
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
See also
For more information about the business function SCM-APO, Aggregated Planning in DP, SNP,
CTM see the business function documentation in SAP Library under Business Functions (SAP
Enhancement Package 1 for SAP SCM 7.0) -> Business Functions in SAP SCM -> Business
Functions in SAP APO -> SCM-APO, Aggregated Planning in DP, SNP, CTM.
2.2.3 SCM_APO_HIER_AGG_PLAN: Bus.Funct. SCM-APO, Aggregated
Planning in DP, SNP and CTM (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, the SCM-APO,
Aggregated Planning in DP, SNP and CTM is available. With this business function, you can take
advantage of the planning enhancements for aggregated planning in Demand Planning (DP), Supply
Network Planning (SNP) and Capable-to-Match (CTM).
For more information, see the following release notes:
- SCM_APO_HIER_AGG_PLAN: Enhancements in Interactive SNP (New)
- SCM_APO_HIER_AGG_PLAN: Hierarchy-Based Aggregated Planning (New)
- SCM_APO_HIER_AGG_PLAN: Time-Dependent Location Product Hierarchies
See also
For more information, see the business function documentation in SAP Library for SAP Supply Chain
Management on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com under Enhancement Package 1 ->
Business Functions (SAP Enhancement Package 1 for SAP SCM 7.0) -> Business Functions in
SAP APO -> SCM-APO, Aggregated Planning in DP, SNP and CTM .
2.2.4 SCM_APO_DISTR_REC: BF SCM-APO, Plng. with SNC Planned Rcpt. in
APO (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, the SCM-APO,
Planning with SNC-Planned Receipts in APO business function is available. With this business function,
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 53
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
you can consider SAP SNC-planned receipts in your Capable-to-Match (CTM) planning run, where the
SNC-planned receipts are considered as constraints in CTM planning.
Effects on Existing Data
The following user interfaces have new elements:
- Capable-to-Match Planning, under Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Multilevel Supply &
Demand Matching -> Planning -> Capable-to-Match (CTM) Planning: Strategies -> Special
Strategies tab page:
- Consider Receipt-Dependent Constraint checkbox
- Consider Early and Late Receipt-Dependent Constraint checkbox
- Location product master data, under Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Master Data ->
Product -> Product, SNP2 tab page:
- Critical Component checkbox
There is a new SNP planning book 9ASNP06 and key figure Distribution receipt (SNC-planned)
available in SAP APO.
The new alert Distribution receipt (SNC-planned) is not available is available in the Alert Monitor.
Effects on Data Transfer
In SAP APO, the demand data is sent to SAP SNC using the Send Demand Data transaction. On the
SAP Easy Access screen, choose Advanced Planning and Optimization -> APO Administration ->
Integration -> Integration with SAP Supply Network Collaboration -> Send Demand Data (TA
/SAPAPO/PROACT_OUT).
For more information on the reports SAP SNC uses see SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Integration of Planned
Receipts with the Customer (New)
Effects on Customizing
The Business Add-In (BAdI) BAdI: Change of Planning Area is available in Customizing for
Advanced Planning and Optimization, under the following nodes:
- Supply Chain Planning -> Supply Network Planning (SNP) -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for
Supply Network Planning (SNP)
- Supply Chain Planning -> Multilevel Supply & Demand Matching (SDM) ->
Capable-to-Match (CTM) -> Business Add-Ins (BAdI) for CTM
See also
For more information, see the SAP SNC release note SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Integration of Planned
Receipts with the Customer (New).
For more information about the business function SCM-APO, Planning with SNC-Planned Receipts in
APO, see the business function documentation in SAP Library under Business Functions (SAP
Enhancement Package 1 for SAP SCM 7.0) -> Business Functions in SAP SCM -> Business
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 54
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Functions in SAP APO -> SCM-APO, Planning with SNC Planned Receipts in APO.
2.2.5 SCM_APO_DP_SNP_CTM: BF SCM-APO, Chart Us. (DP/SNP), Merging
Ord. (CTM) (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, the SCM-APO,
Chart Usability (DP/SNP), Merging Orders (CTM) business function is available. With this business
function, you can take advantage of the enhancements in Supply Network Planning (SNP), Demand
Planning (DP) and Capable-to-Match (CTM).
For more information, see the following release notes:
- SCM_APO_DP_SNP_CTM: Chart and TLB Usability (New)
- SCM_APO_DP_SNP_CTM: Enhancements in CTM (New)
- SCM_APO_DP_SNP_CTM: Freely-Definable Attributes for Planning-Version-Dependent Location
Products (New)
- SCM_APO_DP_SNP_CTM: Display of Application Logs in Demand Planning (New)
- SCM_APO_DP_SNP_CTM: Consumption Modes (Enhanced)
In addition, the SCM-APO, Chart Usability (DP/SNP), Merging Orders (CTM) business function allows
you to use user constraints in the SNP optimizer. For more information, see the business function
documentation below.
See also
For more information, see the business function documentation in SAP Library at http://sap.help.com
under SAP SCM Enhancement Packages -> Enhancement Package 1 -> Business Functions
(SAP Enhancement Package 1 for SAP SCM 7.0) -> Business Functions in SAP APO ->
SCM-APO, Chart Usability (DP/SNP), Merging Orders (CTM).
2.2.6 SCM_APO_DP_SNP_CTM: Chart and TLB Usability (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, you can use the
improved functions of the chart the system displays in DP/SNP interactive planning, and improvements
in the Transport Load Builder (TLB).
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 55
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Some of the improvements in interactive planning include:
- Improved interaction between the chart and planning grid: when cells are marked in the grid,
associated points in the chart are highlighted, and the other way around.
- Chart display enhancements: you can dynamically set the start and end period of the chart; define
the number of periods in the chart independently from the grid, you can scale the value axis by
defining minimum and maximum values; you can show or hide the chart legend.
- Printing: you can print the chart.
- You can display the chart in the following 3 ways:
- Show only table
- Show table and chart
- Show only chart
- You can invert the value of a key figure.
- You can copy and delete the chart engine settings of a user.
The Transport Load Builder is improved as follows:
You can create product selections and perform a TLB run for selected products only. Using this method
of product selection, the system locks only the selected products, and more than one planner can work on
the same transportation lane. Product selection filters the deployment stock transfer list, but does not filter
the TLB shipments and order items. If a TLB shipment contains non-selected products, it is read-only. If
a shipment contains only selected products, it remains editable.
Effects on Existing Data
The following report has been added: Maintain Chart Customizing
(/SAPAPO/MSDP_CHART_CUSTOM)
The following transaction has been added: on the SAP Easy Access screen choose Advanced
Planning and Optimization -> Demand Planning -> Environment -> Current Settings -> Maintain
Chart Customizing.
The following user interface has been enhanced for the Transport Load Builder (TLB):
On the SAP Easy Access screen choose Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Supply Network
Planning -> Planning -> Transport Load Builder (TLB).
See also
For more information see the main release note for business function SCM-APO, Chart Usability
(DP/SNP), Merging Orders (CTM) or the business function documentation in SAP Library at
http://sap.help.com under SAP SCM Enhancement Packages -> Enhancement Package 1 ->
Business Functions (SAP Enhancement Package 1 for SAP SCM 7.0) -> Business Functions in
SAP APO -> SCM-APO, Chart Usability (DP/SNP), Merging Orders (CTM).
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 56
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
2.2.7 SCM_APO_DP_SNP_CTM: Consumption Modes (Enhanced)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, the
consumption modes for forecast consumption in SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO)
have been enhanced by the following modes:
- Weekly Consumption
- Monthly Consumption
- User-Defined Consumption
If you choose the Weekly Consumption or Monthly Consumption consumption mode, sales orders
consume forecasted quantities that lie in the week or month of the requirements date. The system does not
consider forecasted quantities in other periods.
If you choose the User-Defined Consumption consumption mode, the system makes use of the new
methods SPECIAL_CONSUMPTION or SPECIAL_CONSUMPTION_DETAIL of the Business Add-In
/SAPAPO/DM_BADI_CSP. You can use the methods to define your own consumption logic.
Effects on Existing Data
The following user interface has been changed:
In the location product master, on the Demand tab page, Requirement strategy sub tab page, the
Consumption Mode field has been enhanced by the three consumption modes.
The Business Add-In (BAdI) /SAPAPO/DM_BADI_CSP has been enhanced by the methods
SPECIAL_CONSUMPTION and SPECIAL_CONSUMPTION_DETAIL.
2.2.8 SCM_APO_DRS_PLAN: Bus.Funct. SCM-APO, Third-Party Order Planning
in APO (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, the business
function SCM-APO, Third-Party Order Planning in APO is available. With this business function, you
can enable planning enhancements for third-party order planning in SAP Advanced Planning and
Optimization (SAP APO). Most of the enhancements are excecuted in Capable-to-Match (CTM).
With the enhancements in SAP APO and the related enhancements in SAP Enterprise Resource Planning
(SAP ERP), supply chain planning for third-party orders is now supported. The enhancements provide the
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 57
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
following new functions in SAP APO:
- Forecast consumption for third-party requisitions
A cross-location forecast consumption for third-party requisitions (which are transferred to the
supplier location) and the related forecasts (which are typically available at distribution centers) is
enabled.
- Comparison of third-party demand and receipt elements (CTM)
This function compares the third-party requisitions (demands) and the planned order (receipts)
assigned to each other via pegging relationships with regard to the following :
- Material availability date of the third-party requisition and the material availability date of the
latest planned order
- Quantity of the third-party requisition and the total quantity of the planned orders.
For the third-party requisitions that meet the requested date and quantity, the supply chain planner
can trigger the unblocking in SAP ERP. As a result, the third-party purchasing process in SAP ERP
can be continued. The third-party requisitions that had been blocked in SAP ERP before the
planning in SAP APO started, can now be converted into third-party purchase orders. In SAP APO,
the third-party requisition gets a special status so that it is not considered in the CTM planning any
more.
Before activating this business function, ensure the following:
- You have activated the prerequisite business function Outsourced Manufacturing 2
(LOG_MM_OM_2) for enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0.
- You have made the necessary customizing settings in SAP ERP for creating third-party orders.
- You have set up an integration model in Core Interface (CIF) to transfer the third-party requisitions
from SAP ERP to SAP APO.
Effects on Existing Data
The area menu has been enhanced by the following new entry:
Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Multilevel Demand & Supply Matching -> Reporting ->
Third-Party Supply and Demand Comparison.
See also
For more information about the SAP ERP part of the third-party order planning process, see the release
note for business function Outsourced Manufacturing 2 on Service Marketplace at
http://service.sap.com/releasenotes for SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0.
For more information about the business function SCM-APO, Third-Party Order Planning in APO,
see the business function documentation in SAP Library at http://help.sap.com under
Enhancement Package 1 -> Business Functions (SAP Enhancement Package 1 for SAP SCM
7.0) -> Business Functions in SAP APO -> SCM-APO, Third-Party Order Planning in APO.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 58
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
2.2.9 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Performance Monitor (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, you can use the
performance monitor to collect and display performance data from the Planning Service Manager (PSM).
The performance data includes runtime, location products processed, orders processed, and so on.
Effects on Existing Data
The following user interface has been enhanced for performance monitoring:
On the SAP Easy Access screen, under Advanced Planning and Optimization -> APO
Administration -> Performance Monitor, the node Planning Service Manager is added to display
PSM performance data. The node Delete PSM Data is added under Reorganization.
On the SAP Easy Access screen, under Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Service Parts
Planning (SPP) -> Environment -> Current Settings -> Planning Service Manager -> Define
Planning Profile, the PFM (Performance Monitoring Log) field has been added.
See also
For more information see the SAP Library at http://help.sap.com.
2.2.10 SCM-APO-MD Master Data
2.2.10.1 SCM_APO_HIER_AGG_PLAN: Time-Dependent Location Product
Hierarchies (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, you can use the
following enhancements in time-dependent location product hierarchies:
- You can manually create time-dependent location product hierarchies. To do this, you have to create
a validity period and assign it to a location product.
- You can create, display, and change validity periods.
- You can assign a validity period to a location product, display the time-dependent settings of a
location product, and change the time-dependent settings of a location product.
- You can reorganize time-dependent location products
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 59
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Effects on Existing Data
The following menu entries have been added to the SAP Easy Access screen:
- SCM Basis -> Master Data -> Hierarchy -> Maintain Validity Periods for Time-Dependent
Location Products
- SCM Basis -> Master Data -> Hierarchy -> Maintain Time-Dependent Location Products
- SCM Basis -> Master Data -> Hierarchy -> Reorganize Time-Dependent Location Products
Effects on Customizing
You make the Customizing settings for this function in Customizing for SCM Basis under the following
Customizing activities:
- Master Data -> Hierarchy -> Define Hierarchy Structure
- Master Data -> Hierarchy -> BAdI: Reading of Time-Dependent Location Product
Hierarchies
See also
For more information, see the main release note for business function SCM-APO, Aggregated Planning
in DP, SNP and CTM (New)
2.2.11 SCM-APO-SDM Multilevel Supply & Demand Matching
2.2.11.1 SCM-APO-SDM-CTM Capable-to-Match
2.2.11.1.1 SCM_APO_DP_SNP_CTM: Enhancements in CTM (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0,
Capable-to-Match (CTM) has been enhanced in the following way:
Merging Orders
CTM can reduce excess supply resulting from lot size settings and the CTM sort sequence by considering
the existing stock before creating additional receipt elements.
If you use this function, CTM executes a separate step in the planning run that is repeated each time a
specified number of planned independent requirements is processed. In this step, CTM determines for
each product location combination which orders can be merged and changes the pegging relationships
accordingly. Orders that have no pegging relationships are removed.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 60
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Threshold for Earliness Notification in the Profile of the Explanation Tool
The earliness of an order is the time difference between the order end date and the demand date. If CTM
schedules an order with an earliness that is greater than a given threshold, a corresponding message for
this order is displayed in the explanations for the CTM planning run.
Effects on Existing Data
The user interface for the CTM profile has been enhanced by the checkbox Merge Orders and the field
Frequency of Order Merge. The new UI elements are located on the Strategies tab, subtab Special
Strategies.
The explanation profile for CTM has been enhanced by the field Threshold for Earliness Notification.
2.2.12 SCM-APO-FCS Demand Planning
2.2.12.1 SCM_APO_DP_SNP_CTM: Display of Application Logs in Demand
Planning (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, you can display
application logs that the system created during execution of the following functions in Demand Planning:
- Demand Planning in the background (mass processing)
- Promotion Management
- Proportional Factors Calculation
Effects on Existing Data
The following menu entry has been added to the SAP Easy Access screen:
Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Demand Planning -> Reporting -> Display Application
Logs
The following user interfaces have been changed:
On the screens for creating or changing a planning job for mass processing in Demand Planning, you can
select the new checkbox Do Not Create Spool List. By doing this, you can prevent the system from
creating additional spool lists in the case that the system creates application logs.
You can access these screens from the SAP Easy Access screen by choosing Advanced Planning and
Optimization -> Demand Planning -> Demand Planning in the Background -> Create Demand
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 61
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Planning in the Background or Change Demand Planning in the Background.
2.2.13 SCM-APO-SPP Service Parts Planning
2.2.13.1 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Supersession Available if BOD Contains ROP
Products (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, you can use the
supersession service even if your bill of distribution (BOD) contains location products using reorder
point-based (ROP) planning only.
If this is the case, the system sets the current date (the date of running the service) as the date for the
following:
- At each entry location of the predecessor product's sub-BOD that contains only location products
with ROP-based planning:
- the stock exhaustion date
- the stock exhaustion warning date
- At the successor product entry locations
- the successor product planning date
- the successor product receipt date
This also means that the system creates these entry points in the chain in the interchangeability master
data.
Effects on Customizing
You make the Customizing settings for this function in Customizing, under Advanced Planning and
Optimization -> Supply Chain Planning -> Service Parts Planning (SPP) -> Supersession ->
Define Service Profile for Supersession. To use the supersession service if your BOD contains
location products using reorder point-based (ROP) planning only, select the Check ROP checkbox.
See also
For more information see the SAP Library at http://help.sap.com.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 62
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
2.2.13.2 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Future BOD Available in Inventory Planning
(New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, inventory
planning can calculate with future bills of distribution (BODs) in Service Parts Planning (SPP).
This function supports the calculation and display of accurate inventory planning results. For future
periods within the planning horizon when future BODs are effective the EOQ/SFT service runs the
calculation process on the future BOD locations with the following process steps:
- Calculation of lead times
- Calculation of yearly forecast
- Fixing of the parent EOQ period
- Adjustment of parent safety stock for push deployment
- Distribution of parent safety stock for push children
Effects on Existing Data
The following user interface has been enhanced for this function:
On the SAP Easy Access screen, under Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Service Parts
Planning (SPP) -> Inventory Planning -> EOQ and Safety Stock -> EOQ/Safety Stock Planning,
the field BoD has been added to make it possible to select BODs assigned to the specified product.
Effects on Customizing
You make the Customizing settings for this function in Customizing, under Advanced Planning and
Optimization -> Supply Chain Planning -> Service Parts Planning (SPP) -> Inventory Planning ->
Define Service Profile for EOQ/SFT Calculation. The field Hist. Data Fut. has been added to enable
the definition of a TDL time series ID to access demand history for future BODs.
See also
For more information see the SAP Library at http://help.sap.com.
2.2.13.3 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: DRP: Global Stock on Entry Location (New)
Use
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 63
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, distribution
requirements planning (DRP) creates a consolidated view at the entry location of the BOD by rolling up
not only demands but also excess stock along the distribution network. Following this, inventory
balancing creates stock transport orders to transport the excess stock to cover demands at other locations.
Effects on Existing Data
The following user interface has been enhanced:
On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Master Data ->
Product -> Product. In the product master data, choose the Properties of SPP tab page.
See also
For more information see the SAP Library at http://help.sap.com.
2.2.13.4 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: STO GATP Check in Deployment (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, the Business
Add-In (BAdI) BAdI: Splitting Depl. and Invntry Bal. STOs According to Storage Locations
(/SAPAPO/SPP_DEPL_REDEPL_STO_SL) is available. You can use this BAdI to split stock
transport orders (STOs) created by Deployment, Inventory Balancing, and Inventory Balancing for
Unserviceable Products according to storage location stock availability.
Effects on Customizing
You find the BAdI in Customizing, under Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Supply Chain
Planning -> Service Parts Planning (SPP) -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Service Parts
Planning (SPP) -> BAdI: Splitting Depl. and Invntry Bal. STOs According to Storage Locations.
See also
For more information, see the SAP Library at http://help.sap.com.
2.2.13.5 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Stability Rule Assignment for Location
Products in DRP (New)
Use
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 64
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, the Business
Add-In (BAdI) BAdI: Stability Rule Assignment for Location Products
(/SAPAPO/SPP_DRP_STABILITY_RULE) is available. You can use this BAdI to change the
stability rules in distribution requirements planning (DRP).
Effects on Customizing
You find this BAdI in Customizing, under Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Supply Chain
Planning -> Service Parts Planning (SPP) -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Service Parts
Planning (SPP) -> BAdIs for Distribution Requirements Planning (DRP) -> BAdI: Stability Rule
Assignment for Location Products.
2.2.13.6 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Sales Order PSM Trigger for DRP (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, a new PSM
trigger is available for DRP. The system sets the trigger when a sales order arrives at the core interface
(CIF). In accordance with the standard trigger delivery, the trigger is not active in the system, you have to
activate it if you want to use it.
The Business Add-In (BAdI) BAdI: Specification of DRP PSM Trigger
(/SAPAPO/DM_SPP_SALES) is available. You can use this BAdI to determine in CIF whether the
trigger should be created or not for a particular order.
Effects on Customizing
You find the BAdI in Customizing, under Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Supply Chain
Planning -> Service Parts Planning (SPP) -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Service Parts
Planning (SPP) -> BAdIs for Distribution Requirements Planning (DRP) -> BAdI: Specification of
DRP PSM Trigger.
See also
For more information, see the SAP Library at http://help.sap.com.
2.2.13.7 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Example ATP BAdI Implementation for
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 65
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Realignment Services (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, the Business
Add-In (BAdI) /SAPAPO/PDEM_ATP_CHECK_IF has an example implementation in the system.
You can use the example implementation to determine the customer-facing and stockholding locations
during realignment services by a simple logic that involves checking the replenishment indicator and the
BOD structure. This is useful if you do not require or do not even implement a GATP logic for
determining the customer-facing and stockholding locations for your SPP demand history. In such a case,
you can use the example implementation of the BAdI.
2.2.13.8 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Selective Version Merge (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, the system
provides a selection possibility for the target version of the attributes of the master data that you want to
merge in transaction Merge Master Data of Inactive Version with Active Version
(/SAPAPO/VM_SPP). This means that the system replaces only the chosen attributes. Previously, the
target attributes were overwritten by the source attributes when you merged versions of master data. This
function makes it possible to select which attributes the system should replace.
Effects on Existing Data
The following user interfaces have been enhanced for selective version merge:
On the SAP Easy Access screen, under Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Master Data ->
Application-Specific Master Data -> Service Parts Planning (SPP) -> Merge Master Data of
Inactive Version with Active Version, the following elements were added:
- Maintain Profile pushbutton
You use this pushbutton to select the fields, attributes, profiles you want the system to use in the
merge.
- Product Fields field
You use this field to select the version-dependent location product-related fields.
- Location Fields field
You use this field to select the version-dependent location-related fields.
- Transportation Lane Fields field
You use this field to select the version-dependent transportation lane-related fields.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 66
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
2.2.13.9 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Shortage Monitor and Worklist Enhancements
(New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, the Shortage
Monitor and worklists in Service Parts Planning (SPP) have the following new features:
Shortage Monitor
- Displays additional comprehensive overall information on the confirmation and advanced shipping
notification (ASN) quantities. This complements the information already provided (for example,
open quantity) and gives the user an overall view of the shortage.
- Determines the request status regarding advanced shipping notification (ASN) information. The
request status is set as Not Sufficient ASN when an existing ASN does not fully cover the
requested date and quantity. It is set as Sufficient ASN when an existing ASN fully covers the
requested date and quantity.
- Display the Purchase Order Worklist and Purchase Order Item Groups user interfaces, in the
Shortage Overview.
Note To display the Purchase Order Worklist and Purchase Order Item Groups user interfaces, you
must activate the business function SCM-SNC Supply Network Collaboration 1
(SCM_SNC_GEN1).
Detail Component
This function can be used to show form-based context information in most of the Planner's Worklist and
Customer's Worklist queries. The context information that the system displays is highly personalizable
by setting up the worklist detail component customizing with own reading routines for each POWL type
separately.
The detail component is available for the following worklist types:
- Planner's Worklist:
- Stocking/Destocking Approval
- STO Approval
- Procurement Approval
- Surplus Approval
- Forecast Approval
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 67
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Alerts (Category-Based)
- Alerts (Product-Based)
- Alerts (Location-Based)
- Stocking/Destocking
- STO
- Procurement
- Critical Products
- Critical Sales Orders
- Customer's Worklist:
- Excess Stock
- Stocking/ Destocking
- Stocking/ Destocking Agreement
- STO Approval
- Supersession
In addition, you can enable your own worklist types to display the detail component.
Business Context Viewer (BCV) Integration
The side panel of Business Context Viewer (BCV) displays analytic information in a table or chart
format. You can open the side panel from any one of the Planner's Worklist queries, by choosing
Additional Information.
The side panel comes delivered with predefined BCV queries that provide information about the
following topics:
- Alerts
- Current demand and forecast
- Forecast time series
- Shortage overview
- Stock overview
As BCV is a highly flexible framework, you can create your own BCV queries based on your own
business needs, or modify the ones delivered by SAP.
Effects on Existing Data
The following user interfaces have been enhanced for the Shortage Monitor:
On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Service Parts
Planning (SPP) -> Reporting / Monitoring -> Web UIs for Service Parts Planning -> SPP -
Supplier View and choose Shortage Analysis -> Shortage Monitor.
On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Service Parts
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 68
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Planning (SPP) -> Reporting / Monitoring -> Web UIs for Service Parts Planning -> SPP -
Planner View (Internal) and choose Shortage Analysis -> Shortage Monitor.
In the Shortage Monitor screen the following columns have been added:
- Suppl. Conf. Qty. Crit. Hor. (Supplier Confirmation Quantity in Critical Horizon)
- ASN Qty. Crit. Hor. (ASN Quantity in Critical Horizon)
In the Shortage Monitor screen the following request statuses have been added in the Request Status
column:
- 5 Not Sufficient ASN
- 6 Sufficient ASN
To display the Purchase Order Worklist and Purchase Order Item Groups user interfaces, in the
Shortage Overview, choose Purchase Orders -> PO Worklist or PO Item Groups.
The following user interfaces have been enhanced for the Detail Component:
On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Service Parts
Planning (SPP) -> Reporting / Monitoring -> Web UIs for Service Parts Planning -> Customer's
Worklist.
In the SAP NetWeaver Business Client (NWBC), choose Planner's Worklist.
In both worklists, most of the queries have been enhanced by a hyperlink, which opens the detail
component at the bottom of the screen, if you click on it. The detail component can contain information
about the product, such as its BOD assignment, or the location product, such as its ship-from location.
You can add your own data elements to add to the information displayed, according to your business
requirements.
The following user interfaces have been enhanced for Business Context Viewer (BCV) integration:
In the SAP NetWeaver Business Client (NWBC), choose Planner's Worklist.
You can open the side panel from any of the Planner's Worklist queries, by choosing Additional
Information. The side panel contains accordion items that group your query views, quick views,
favorites, and so on, allowing you to analyze business data quickly and easily.
Effects on Customizing
You make the Customizing settings for the Detail Component in the following Customizing activity:
In Customizing for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM), under Advanced Planning and
Optimization -> Supply Chain Planning -> Service Parts Planning (SPP) -> Monitoring -> Detail
Component for Planner's Worklist and Customer's Worklist -> Maintain Detail Component.
You make the Customizing settings for Business Context Viewer (BCV) integration, in the following
Business Add-In:
In Customizing for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM), under Advanced Planning and
Optimization -> Supply Chain Planning -> Service Parts Planning (SPP) -> Business Add-Ins
(BAdIs) for Service Parts Planning (SPP) -> BAdI: Set Context Key of Business Context Viewer
(BCV).
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 69
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
See also
For more information about the Shortage Monitor, Detail Component, and Business Context Viewer
(BCV) integration, see SAP Library at http://help.sap.com.
2.2.13.10 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Route Determination (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, route
determination is available in Service Parts Planning (SPP). The route determination function allows you
to find the best route in the first step of the internal network replenishment process. In subsequent steps
executed in SAP ERP, the route is used in stock transport orders and, finally, in outbound deliveries.
Note: To enable route determination in Service Parts Planning, you must activate the business function
Service Parts Management: Innovations in ERP (SPE_CI_1).
Effects on Existing Data
The following user interfaces have been enhanced for Route Determination:
On the SAP Easy Access screen, under Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Service Parts
Planning (SPP) -> Deployment and Inventory Balancing -> Deployment and Inventory
Balancing, the following fields have been added to the Deployment STOs and Inventory Balancing
STOs tab pages under STO Approval:
- Route
- Geography Group
- Export Relevancy
- Transportation Service Provider
- Next Cross Docking Location
You can also view the route information in the Customer's Worklist -> STO Approval screen under
Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Service Parts Planning (SPP) -> Reporting/ Monitoring
-> Web UIs for Service Parts Planning -> Customer's Worklist and in the Planner's Worklist in the
SAP NetWeaver Business Client.
The scheduling explanation program (TA /sapapo/spp_schd_exp) has been enhanced by the
following field:
- Route
Effects on Customizing
You make the Customizing settings for Route Determination in the following Customizing activities:
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 70
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
In Customizing for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM), under Advanced Planning and
Optimization -> Supply Chain Planning -> Service Parts Planning (SPP) -> Deployment -> Make
General Settings for Deployment.
In Customizing for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM), under Advanced Planning and
Optimization -> Supply Chain Planning -> Service Parts Planning (SPP) -> Inventory Balancing
-> Make General Settings for Inventory Balancing.
Select the Use Routing Guide for Scheduling of Stock Transfer Orders checkbox if you want to use
the routing guide.
The following Business Add-In (BAdI) is available for Route Determination:
In Customizing for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM), choose Advanced Planning and
Optimization -> Supply Chain Planning -> Service Parts Planning (SPP) -> Business Add-Ins
(BAdIs) for Service Parts Planning (SPP) -> BAdI: Define Routing Guide Parameters.
See also
For more information see the SAP Library at http://help.sap.com.
2.2.13.11 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Multi-Level Push Deployment (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, you can use
multi-level push deployment in Service Parts Planning (SPP).
This function enables push deployment and push deployment from supplier to deploy over multiple levels
of the bill of distribution (BOD).
As many companies are moving to models where products are being shipped to various levels in the
supply chain directly from the suppliers, and want to reduce overall logistics cost, the ability to skip
entire levels within their network is required. For instance, if your supply chain has four levels for some
parts, it makes sense to skip levels and replenish the bottom of your supply chain directly from your entry
point location. Avoiding the logistic costs from moving the products from location to location down
through the supply chain is the main objective of this function.
Effects on Existing Data
The following user interface has been enhanced for multi-level push deployment:
On the SAP Easy Access screen, under Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Service Parts
Planning (SPP) -> Planning -> Deployment and Inventory Balancing -> Deployment and
Inventory Balancing, the Proposed Qty field has been added to the Deployment Simulation and
Deployment Log views.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 71
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Effects on Customizing
You make the Customizing settings for this function in Customizing, under Advanced Planning and
Optimization -> Supply Chain Planning -> Service Parts Planning (SPP) -> Deployment -> Define
Service Profile for Deployment, in the Mode field.
The following Business Add-In (BAdI) is available for multi-level push deployment:
- In Customizing, under Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Supply Chain Planning ->
Service Parts Planning (SPP) -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Service Parts Planning
(SPP) -> BAdIs for Deployment -> BAdI: Distribution Check.
You can use this BAdI to check if deploying a certain quantity to a certain location is allowed.
- In Customizing, under Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Supply Chain Planning ->
Service Parts Planning (SPP) -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Service Parts Planning
(SPP) -> BAdIs for Deployment -> BAdI: Determination of Demand in Deployment.
You can use this BAdI to determine for each deployment step if deployment to this location is
allowed.
- In Customizing, under Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Supply Chain Planning ->
Service Parts Planning (SPP) -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Service Parts Planning
(SPP) -> BAdIs for Deployment -> BAdI: Determination of Parameters for the Time-Related
Supply Limit.
You can use this BAdI to dynamically calculate the parameter for the time supply limit.
See also
For more information, see the SAP Library at http://help.sap.com.
2.2.13.12 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Performance Monitor (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, you can use the
performance monitor to collect and display performance data from the Planning Service Manager (PSM).
The performance data includes runtime, location products processed, orders processed, and so on.
Effects on Existing Data
The following user interface has been enhanced for performance monitoring:
On the SAP Easy Access screen, under Advanced Planning and Optimization -> APO
Administration -> Performance Monitor, the node Planning Service Manager is added to display
PSM performance data. The node Delete PSM Data is added under Reorganization.
On the SAP Easy Access screen, under Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Service Parts
Planning (SPP) -> Environment -> Current Settings -> Planning Service Manager -> Define
Planning Profile, the PFM (Performance Monitoring Log) field has been added.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 72
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
See also
For more information see the SAP Library at http://help.sap.com.
2.2.13.13 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Trigger Monitoring (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, you can use the
trigger count service to monitor the trigger volumes in the system, and check which triggers were
processed during particular Planning Service Manager (PSM) runs. The statistic is available both in the
application log of the planning service as well as on a user interface where selections can be applied.
Effects on Existing Data
The following user interfaces have been enhanced for trigger monitoring:
On the SAP Easy Access screen, under Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Service Parts
Planning (SPP) -> Environment -> Current Settings -> Planning Service Manager -> Define
Planning Profile, the TrigStat. (Trigger Statistics) field has been added.
On the SAP Easy Access screen, under Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Service Parts
Planning (SPP) -> Environment -> Current Settings -> Service Profiles, the transaction Define
Service Profile for Trigger Count Service has been added.
On the SAP Easy Access screen, under SCM Basis -> Planning Service Manager -> Current
Settings, the transaction Trigger Monitor has been added. You can use this transaction to display the
trigger count that you want to monitor.
On the SAP Easy Access screen, under SCM Basis -> Data Management Layer, the Delete Trigger
Count transaction has been added.
Effects on Customizing
You make the Customizing settings for this function in Customizing, under SCM Basis -> Data
Management Layer -> Triggers (For Planning File Entry) -> Define Service Profile for Trigger
Count Service.
See also
For more information, see SAP Library at http://help.sap.com.
2.2.13.14 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Flexible Bill of Distribution (BOD) (New)
Use
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 73
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, you can use the
flexible BOD function in Service Parts Planning (SPP).
There are two ways of handling BODs in the system:
- Static BOD
- Flexible BOD (available as of EHP 1 for SAP SCM 7.0)
Static BOD was the only logic the system used up to SAP SCM 7.0. In the case of static BOD, a BOD
can only be assigned to a product if the product exists in all of the locations of the BOD as a location
product.
Flexible BOD simplifies the maintenance of BODs and their assignment to products in Service Parts
Planning. In the case of Flexible BOD, the restriction that the product must exist as location product at all
locations of the BOD that is being assigned to it no longer holds. Consuming applications consider the
product at only those locations of the BOD where it exists as location product. The following restrictions
must be observed to maintain the consistency of the BOD:
- If a location product exists at a certain BOD location, a location product for the product must also
exist at the parent location of this BOD location.
- A location product must exist at one entry point of the BOD at least.
- If a location has a virtual child location in the BOD, but no location product of the product exist at
any of its physical child locations, the virtual child location is considered as a location without
location product.
This enhancement can greatly reduce the number of BODs needed for distribution network modeling in
the SPP system.
The two options do not exist simultaneously in the system, you must choose between them and make the
relevant settings.
To use this function, you must make a Customizing setting as described in the Effects on Customizing
section below.
Effects on Customizing
You make the Customizing settings for this function in Customizing, under SCM Basis -> Master Data
-> Hierarchy -> Define Bill of Distribution (BOD) Type. The system uses the flexible BOD function
only if you select Flexible BOD in the BOD Type field.
See also
For more information see the SAP Library at http://help.sap.com.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 74
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
2.2.13.15 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: UI Enhancements (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, the following
UI enhancements are available:
STO Approval UI
The following new selection criteria are added:
- Planner
- Product Group
- Product Group Type
All of the above selection criteria are range, and work together as well as independently. None are
mandatory.
The following new navigation buttons are available:
- Forecasting
- DRP
- Inventory Planning
- Product Detail
You select one STO from the list, and press one of the navigation buttons. The system then navigates to
the corresponding screen. The Product Detail screen starts in a new browser window, the others in the
same SAPGUI session as the starting STO Approval.
The system fills the selection parameters for the target application, and triggers an automatic query. The
selection parameters are taken from the selected STO. The parameters are planning version, product and
location (the ship from location of the selected STO is forwarded to the location selection of the target
screens).
The new navigation buttons appear on all STO Approval tab pages.
Note: due to technical limitations of the UI Framework, the navigation tree (left screen area) of the
Deployment application remains visible when you navigate away to one of the target applications.
Forecast Approval UI
The following new selection criteria are added:
- Planner
- Product Group
- Product Group Type
All of these are range, and work together as well as independently. None are mandatory.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 75
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Inventory Planning UI
The following new navigation buttons are available:
- Forecasting
- DRP
- Deployment
The buttons are enabled only if a specific location product has already been loaded. When you press one
of the buttons, the system navigates to the corresponding UI in the same SAPGUI session. The selection
parameters (planning version, location, product) of the target application are filled and a query is run
automatically.
Note: due to technical limitations of the UI Framework, when you navigate to Deployment, the
navigation tree normally visible in the Deployment application is not available. You are navigated to the
Deployment Simulation screen.
The following new fields are available on the EOQ/SFT tab page:
- DRP Planning Mode (Displays whether you are using period-based, or reorder point-based
planning in DRP.)
- EOQ Calculation Model (Specifies whether the system uses the normal or Poisson distribution as
the statistical calculation model for the combined calculation of the economic order quantity (EOQ)
and safety stock (SFT).)
Both new fields are display only.
Planning Profile UI
The following new columns are available:
- Rd.Trg.Fst (Read Trigger First)
- Sel. Res. (Buffer Selection Result)
- PSM Selection Result
The new columns are hidden by default, you can display them by pressing the Settings link on the upper
right corner of the result list ALV, and moving them from the Hidden Columns list to the Displayed
Columns list there.
Location Product Master Data (SPP Inv. Balancing/ Surplus Tab Page)
The field No Inventory Balancing of Unserviceable Product has been added to the location product
master, to specify whether you want to exclude the unserviceable location product from inventory
balancing.
Effects on Existing Data
The following user interfaces have changed:
- STO Approval UI
On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Service
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 76
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Parts Planning (SPP) -> Planning -> Deployment and Inventory Balancing -> Deployment
and Inventory Balancing.
- Forecast Approval UI
On the SAP Easy Access screen choose Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Service
Parts Planning (SPP) -> Planning -> Forecasting -> Approve Forecast.
- Inventory Planning UI
On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Service
Parts Planning (SPP) -> Planning -> Inventory Planning -> EOQ and Safety Stock ->
EOQ/Safety Stock Planning.
- Planning Profile UI
On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Service
Parts Planning (SPP) -> Environment -> Current Settings -> Planning Service Manager ->
Display Planning Profile.
- Location Product Master Data
On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Master
Data -> Product -> Product.
2.2.13.16 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Assignment of Products to a BOD
Improvement (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, the report
Assignment of Products to a BOD (/SAPAPO/MULTIPROD_ASGN_BOD) is improved in a way
that if there are more than one missing location products in a bill of distribution, it adds them to the
application log and then continues processing the rest of the location products. In previous releases, the
report stopped if there was a missing location product, which caused delays in the assignment of large
numbers of location products. Also, since the report stopped at the first missing location product,
customers had no means of finding out how many location products were missing altogether. This
improvement now solves both problems.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 77
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
2.2.13.17 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Restocking in Stocking Decision Service
(New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, you can use
restocking in the stocking decision service. Restocking is an option in the stocking decision service,
whereby a location product that had a planning-relevant replenishment indicator previously, but does not
currently, is stocked again. In such cases, the system sets the replenishment indicator as ST (stocked),
instead of SN (stocked new).
Effects on Customizing
You make the Customizing settings for this function in Customizing, under Advanced Planning and
Optimization -> Supply Chain Planning -> Service Parts Planning -> Inventory Planning -> Make
General Settings for Inventory Planning.
See also
For more information see the SAP Library at http://help.sap.com.
2.2.13.18 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: BF SCM-APO-SPP, Service Parts Planning 1
(New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, the
SCM-APO-SPP, Service Parts Planning 1 business function is available. With this business function,
you can use the following functions in SAP SPP:
- Shortage Monitor and Worklist enhancements:
- Shortage Monitor
- Detail Component
- Business Context Viewer (BCV) integration
For more information, see the following release note: SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Shortage Monitor
and Worklist Enhancements (New)
- Route Determination
For more information, see the following release note: SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Route
Determination (New)
- Multi-level push deployment
For more information, see the following release note: SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Multi-Level Push
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 78
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Deployment (New)
- Performance monitoring
For more information, see the following release note: SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Performance
Monitor (New)
- Trigger monitoring
For more information, see the following release note: SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Trigger Monitoring
(New)
- Flexible bill of distribution (BOD)
For more information, see the following release note: SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Flexible Bill of
Distribution (BOD)
- STO and Forecast Approval UI enhancements
For more information, see the following release note: SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: UI Enhancements
(New)
- Improvement of report Assignment of Products to a BOD
For more information, see the following release note: SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Assignment of
Products to a BOD Improvement (New)
- Restocking is available in the stocking decision service
For more information, see the following release note: SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Restocking in
Stocking Decision Service (New)
- Supersession is available if BOD has location products using reorder-point based planning only
For more information, see the following release note: SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Supersession
Available if BOD Contains ROP Products
- Inventory planning can calculate with future BODs
For more information, see the following release note: SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Future BOD
Available in Inventory Planning (New)
- A consolidated view on global stock is available on entry location in DRP
For more information, see the following release note: SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: DRP: Global Stock
on Entry Location (New)
- Business Add-In for deployment STO GATP check is available
For more information, see the following release note: SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: STO GATP Check
in Deployment (New)
- Business Add-In for stability rule assignment in DRP is available
For more information, see the following release note: SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Stability Rule
Assignment for Location Products in
- Sales Order PSM trigger for DRP
For more information, see the following release note: SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Sales Order PSM
Trigger for DRP (New)
- Example GATP BAdI implementation
For more information, see the following release note: SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Example ATP
BAdI Implementation for Realignment
- Selective version merge
For more information, see the following release note: SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Selective Version
Merge (New)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 79
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
See also
For more information about the business function SCM-APO-SPP, Service Parts Planning 1, see the
business function documentation in SAP Library under Business Functions (SAP Enhancement
Package 1 for SAP SCM 7.0) -> Business Functions in SAP SCM -> Business Functions in SAP
APO -> SCM-APO-SPP, Service Parts Planning 1.
2.2.14 SCM-APO-MSP Maintenance and Service Planning
2.2.14.1 SCM_APO_MSP_EPS: Business Function SCM Enhanced MSP for
MRO (New)
Use
As of SAP Supply Chain Management (SCM) 7.0 enhancement pack 1, the business function SCM
Enhanced Maintenance & Service Planning for Maintenance, Repair, and Overhaul (MRO) is
available. With this business function, you can enhance the functions of the existing Maintenance &
Service Planning (MSP) solution and also benefit from general improvements in usability. The new
developments are delivered on SAP SCM 7.0 enhancement pack 1 and SAP ERP 6.0 enhancement pack
5.
This set of enhancements enables you to optimize utilization of maintenance facilities and other
resources. It also adapts MSP functions for use across diverse industries.
The new developments increase the stability of the MSP solution and ensure improved integration
between SAP SCM and SAP ERP systems. MSP can either be run independently within SAP SCM or
integrated with Maintenance Event Builder (MEB) in SAP ERP. The enhancements have also improved
MSP#s long-term planning capabilities and allow more accurate modeling of potential business scenarios.
The new developments included within SAP SCM 7.0 enhancement pack 1 are as follows:
Master Data:
- Maintenance objects can now been deassigned from specific models (planning versions) even if
there is transaction data. In earlier releases, if transaction data existed for a model, you were not
allowed to deassign the maintenance object from the model; this would result in a warning message.
When you now deassign maintenance objects from a model in MSP, the system searches for
transaction data in the relevant model. Deassignment is carried out only if you choose to delete
transaction data from the model.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 80
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- When the technical object structure is updated, whether from IE4N, IE01/IE02, IL01/IL02, or
Enterprise Services, the relevant maintenance objects in MSP are now automatically updated as
well. This setting can be activated either when the planning board is loaded or through a batch job.
Previously, when components were removed or installed in SAP ERP, for example, MSP did not
immediately recognize this and you had to remember to go to the maintenance object transaction
and save the object.
Integration between MSP and SAP ERP:
- The SAP APO system now transfers independent slots within the planning horizon to SAP ERP as
revisions. Independent slots within the planning horizon are now flagged to indicate such a transfer.
A configuration table in SAP ERP Customizing defines what revision type to create.
One-time demands within the planning horizon are transferred to SAP ERP as notifications. If that
notification already exists in SAP ERP, you can link it to the one-time demand in MSP.
- MSP can now be used to create revisions with different revision types through the configuration
table. A Customizing setting is provided for this purpose. Previously, only one revision type was
available.
- MSP now allows the modeling of SAP ERP objects with local intervals and local average
performances.
Planning Board:
- Error handling is in place to ensure that rescheduling failure never deletes slot orders or check
orders.
Planning and Simulation:
- You can now specify a profile - /SAPAPO/MSP_CRFP - that links mechanics to service areas
within the same location. The automated planning run chooses the mechanics and service area based
on the relationship mentioned in the profile. For example, service area Hangar H1 in Location L1
uses check resource Mechanic M1. If the hangar is changed from H1 to H2 in the same location, the
check resource is changed to M2, which belongs to Hangar H2.
- When higher level checks are performed, the cycle for lower level checks is now reset. Resetting
checks involves the resetting of cycles of lower level checks that coincide with a higher level check
based on a resetting profile (/SAPAPO/MSP_RESTPROF) you maintain.
- Compliance date calculation is based on multiple references. Higher level checks are taken into
account in the calculation of due dates for lower level checks.
Constraints:
- Resetting checks behave in the expected manner only if the maintenance profile priorities are
maintained in line with the resetting profile.
- Net Change Plan does not resolve Demand Overlap Alerts.
- Manual changes on the planning board take priority over the the check resource filter settings. For
example, if you manually change the mode of the check tasklist, the changes take place even if the
check resource does not belong to the service area as per the filter settings.
- If a check resource does not belong to any service area, the planning run does not consider it while
filtering. It can be used with any service area according to the mode priority.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 81
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- The batch report /SAPAPO/MSP_ADJUST_PLAN unpacks demands from the master demand of
the installation location in SAP APO when equipment is uninstalled from the installation location in
SAP ERP. However, it does not package demands to the master demands in SAP APO when
equipment is installed on a superior location in SAP ERP.
2.2.15 SCM-APO-ATP Global Available-to-Promise
2.2.15.1 SCM_APO_ATP_1: Configurable Process Scheduling (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, a new BC set is
available. The BC set contains the SCHEDL_MM_RG schema for configurable process scheduling
(CPS).
You can use the SCHEDL_MM_RG schema to schedule stock transport orders with static route
determination in the same way as for liveCache scheduling.
You can only use the SCHEDL_MM_RG schema if you are using an ERP system for an OLTP system as
of SAP ERP 6.0 including SAP enhancement package 5.
Effects on Customizing
You can activate the BC set in Customizing for SCM Basis under Configurable Process Scheduling ->
Scheduling Schema -> Define Schema.
See also
For more information, see the main release note for business function SCM-APO-ATP, Usability and
Various Functions.
2.2.15.2 SCM_APO_ATP_1: Consistency of Descriptive Characteristics (New)
Use
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 82
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, you can check
for consistency between the descriptive characteristic (descriptive characteristic ID) information stored
per requirement item in liveCache, and the information stored for the item in the SAP SCM database (SD
Order Tables).
Effects on Existing Data
The user interface for the Check Sales Order and Delivery Demands report has been reworked by
adding the Check Descriptive Characteristics checkbox.
You can open the report on the SAP Easy Access screen by choosing Advanced Planning and
Optimization -> Global ATP -> Environment -> Data Cleansing.
See also
For more information, see the main release note for business function SCM-APO-ATP, Usability and
Various Functions.
2.2.15.3 SCM_APO_ATP_1: Expected Goods Movement (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, you can use
expected goods movement (EGM) orders for the following EGM types:
- Expected putaway
You can use this EGM type for stock that is posted on dock or another storage location before it is
put away at a final storage location, called EGM storage location.
- Stock hiding
You can use this EGM type for stock that is not available right away after a stock posting on dock or
another storage location, due to quality inspection, for example. That is, this process depicts the time
between stock posting and stock availability.
EGM orders are planning-related, virtual documents that exist only in SAP SCM.
Effects on System Administration
To avoid data inconsistencies, the quantity of an EGM order must match the stock quantity at the stock
storage location. You can use the report Remove Inconsistencies Between Stock and EGM Order to
search for an EGM order with inconsistencies and remove the inconsistencies. To open the report, on the
screen SAP Easy Access choose Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Global ATP ->
Environment -> Data Cleansing.
Effects on Customizing
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 83
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
You can make all settings necessary for an EGM order in Customizing for SAP SCM under Advanced
Planning and Optimization -> Global Available-to-Promise (Global ATP) -> Product Availability
Check -> Pick from Goods Receipt -> Define Settings for Expected Goods Movement.
If you want to change any values of the EGM orders, such as EGM storage location, you can use the
Business Add-In (BAdI) BAdI: Change Duration, EGM Storage Location, and Quantity in Customizing
for SAP SCM under Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Global Available-to-Promise (Global
ATP) -> Enhancements -> Availability Check -> Change Data of Expected Goods Movement
Orders.
See also
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP SCM under Expected Goods Movement.
2.2.15.4 SCM_APO_ATP_1: Bus.Funct. SCM-APO-ATP, Usb./Var. Fnct. (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, the business
function SCM-APO-ATP, Usability and Various Functions is available. You can use this business
function to improve your company's overall performance in making order promises to customers,
increase customer service levels, gain visibility into the inventory levels across the whole supply chain
and lower total sales costs. The functions of this business function help you increase delivery confidence
and technically improve order consistency, stability of your Global ATP as well as improve the overall
usability and performance in making order promises to your customers.
For more information about the individual functions, see the following release notes:
- SCM_APO_ATP_1: Backorder Processing (New)
- SCM_APO_ATP_1: MATP With Remaining Requirements (New)
- SCM_APO_ATP_1: Merging of Subitems (New)
- SCM_APO_ATP_1: Event-Driven Quantity Assignment (New)
- SCM_APO_ATP_1: Order Due List (New)
- SCM_APO_ATP_1: Expected Goods Movement (New)
- SCM_APO_ATP_1: Configurable Process Scheduling (New)
- SCM_APO_ATP_1: Consistency of Descriptive Characteristics (New)
- SCM_APO_ATP_1: Multi-Item Single Delivery Location (New)
- SCM_APO_ATP_1: Product Allocation (New)
See also
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 84
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP SCM under SCM-APO-ATP, Usability and Various
Functions.
2.2.15.5 SCM_APO_ATP_1: Product Allocation (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, you can use the
following functions for product allocations:
- You can specify a time zone or a way in which the system is to determine the time zone for product
allocations of a product allocation group.
- You can activate the example implementation of two Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) to enhance the
performance and to change the behavior of the following reports:
- Transfer Data to Planning Area (transaction /SAPAPO/ATPQ_PAREA_W)
- Copy Data from Planning Area (transaction /SAPAPO/ATPQ_PAREA_R)
- The system executes a product allocation (PAL) check for a stock transport requisition that was
induced by a location determination in rules-based ATP (RBA), if you have set up a PAL check for
the item and the subitem.
The system derives the check date and characteristic values for the PAL check for the stock
transport requisition directly from the item. That is, the check date does not include transportation
times, and the system carries out the check using the location of the item.
Effects on Customizing
You can specify time zones or a time zone determination in Customizing for SAP SCM under Advanced
Planning and Optimization -> Global Available-to-Promise (Global ATP) -> Product Allocation ->
Maintain Product Allocation Group.
You can activate the example implementation of he BAdIs in Customizing for SAP SCM under the
following nodes:
- Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Global Available-to-Promise (Global ATP) ->
Enhancements -> Product Allocations -> Data Management for Supply and Demand
Planning -> BAdI: Write Data to Planning Area
- Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Global Available-to-Promise (Global ATP) ->
Enhancements -> Product Allocations -> Data Transfer Between Demand Planning and
Product Allocation -> BAdI: Define and Interpret Change History
See also
For more information, see the main release note for business function SCM-APO-ATP, Usability and
Various Functions.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 85
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
2.2.15.6 SCM_APO_ATP_1: MATP With Remaining Requirements (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, you can
influence the date for the remaining requirement of the multilevel ATP check. In this case, the system
does not create the remaining requirement for the required date, but for the latest date of the components'
checking horizon.
Effects on Existing Data
The user interface for the Customizing activity Maintain Check Instructions has been reworked. To the
field Compnts Remain. Reqmt (components' remaining requirements), the following new value has been
added: Create Rem. Rq. at Comp. Lvl for Latst Date of CH(Red. Cnf.) (Create Remaining
Requirement at Component Level for the Latest Date of the Checking Horizon (Reduce Confirmation)).
If you choose this value, the system calculates the date/time for the remaining requirement based on the
checking horizons of the components maintained in the product master.
Effects on Customizing
To make the settings for the Compnts Remain. Regmt field, in Customizing for SAP Supply Chain
Management (SAP SCM), choose the Maintain Check Instructions Customizing activity under
Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Global Available-to-Promise (Global ATP) -> General
Settings.
Alternatively, you can use the Business Add-In (BAdI) BAdI: Change Checking Horizon for MATP
Components to override the standard calculation of the date/time for the remaining requirement that is
based on the product master setting for checking horizons. You can make the settings for this BAdI in
Customizing for SAP SCM under Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Global
Available-to-Promise (Global ATP) -> Enhancements -> ATP Controller -> Remaining
Requirement for Multilevel ATP Check.
See also
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP SCM under Multilevel ATP Check in Two Steps.
2.2.15.7 SCM-APO-ATP-RBA Rules-Based ATP Check
2.2.15.7.1 SCM_APO_ATP_1: Multi-Item Single Delivery Location (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, you can use the
following functions for multi-item single delivery locations (MISL):
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 86
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Validities for products
You can add validities to the product lists you use for MISL. In this way, you can exclude products
from being confirmed in an MISL group for certain periods of time. The system only takes these
validities into account for the confirmation of products.
Note
You cannot specify validities for locations.
Since MISL is mostly used in conjunction with delivery group correlation, it still may happen that
your confirmation date is outside the valid period after delivery group correlation. To avoid this
situation, you can use the calculation profile for the MISL rule described under the following bullet
point.
- Calculation profile in the MISL rule and BAdI BAdI: Change Calculation Profile of MISL Rule
You can maintain a calculation profile for a MISL rule. The valid values of this calculation profile
act as a header value for the whole MISL group and overrule all individually-found values of other
calculation profiles. In this way, you can, for example, enter a value for the "Allowed delay" (that
applies to all items of the MISL group), ensuring that a substitution that is relatively late (and that
would force the system to shift all items of the MISL group to this late date/time) will not be used.
You can use the Business Add-In (BAdI) BAdI: Change Calculation Profile of MISL Rule to change
the values of the calculation profile of the MISL rule.
- Exclusive rules
You can use exclusive rules for MISL to determine products. In this way, you can exclude products
from being confirmed in an MISL group.
Note
You cannot use exclusive rules for location determination.
Effects on Existing Data
The user interface for integrated rule maintenance has been reworked. When you create an MISL rule,
you can find the new group box for the calculation profile on the Product + Loc.Subst tab and the
Product + Loc.Subst (InC MD). To open integrated rule maintenance, on the SAP Easy Access
screen choose Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Master Data -> Rule Maintenance.
On the results overview, the user interface for the MISL details dialog box has been reworked. The new
fields Calculation Profile and Allowed Delay are displayed.
Effects on Customizing
You can use the Business Add-In (BAdI) BAdI: Change Calculation Profile of MISL Rule to change the
values of a calculation profile for an MISL rule. You can make the settings for this BAdI in Customizing
for SAP SCM under Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Global Available-to-Promise (Global
ATP) -> Enhancements -> Rules -> Multi-Item Single Delivery Location -> BAdI: Change
Calculation Profile of MISL Rule.
See also
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP SCM under Multi-Item Single Delivery Location.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 87
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
2.2.15.7.2 SCM_APO_ATP_1: Merging of Subitems (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, you can merge
subitems of the input location product into their main item after the execution of rules-based ATP (RBA).
The subitems must have the following objects in common:
- Sublocation
- Version
- Pegging area
- Characteristic values
- Check mode
Effects on Existing Data
The user interface for the Customizing activity Maintain Check Instructions has been reworked by adding
the Merge Subitems checkbox.
If you select this checkbox, the system merges subitems into their main item, if the RBA was executed
with rules meeting the following requirements: only those substitutions have a confirmation that contain
the input location product. The rules may contain a stock transfer requirement (via location determination
activity) for the input product to the input location.
Effects on Customizing
To select the Merge Subitems checkbox, in Customizing for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP
SCM), choose the Maintain Check Instructions Customizing activity under Advanced Planning and
Optimization -> Global Available-to-Promise (Global ATP) -> General Settings.
See also
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP SCM under Merging of Subitems.
2.2.15.8 SCM-APO-ATP-BOP Backorder Processing
2.2.15.8.1 SCM_APO_ATP_1: Backorder Processing (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, the memory
consumption of the backorder processing (BOP) is reduced, and you can use the following functions of
the interactive BOP that allow for better navigation:
- Search
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 88
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
You can reach the search function by choosing Search (shortcut CTRL+F).
You can search for the following objects:
- Receipt element or requirements element
- Availability date/time or requirements date/time
- Find next
You can reach this function by choosing Find next (shortcut CTRL + G).
If you have searched for an object previously, Find next will find the next matching line. If you
have not searched for an object previously, Find next behaves like the Search function.
- Display current position in the table
Under the ATP List Data table, the text Entry X/Y indicates the current position in the table. X
indicates the position of the topmost row, and Y indicates the total number of rows in the table.
- Scroll to first page, previous page, next page, or last page
You can scroll in the ATP List Data table by pushing one of the following buttons:
- First Page
- Previous Page
- Next Page
- Last Page
Effects on Existing Data
The user interface for the report Interactive Backorder Processing (transaction /SAPAPO/BOPIN) has
been reworked in the following way:
- The following buttons are now active:
- Search
- Find next
- First Page
- Previous Page
- Next Page
- Last Page
- The search dialog box now displays the fields Receipt/Rqmts Elemnt (receipt element or
requirements element), Avail./Reqmts Date (availability date or requirements date), and an entry
field for the availability time or the requirements time.
- The system now displays the text Entry X/Y at the bottom of the ATP List Data group box.
See also
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 89
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
For more information, see the main release note for business function SCM-APO-ATP, Usability and
Various Functions.
2.2.15.9 SCM-APO-ATP-ODL Order Due List
2.2.15.9.1 SCM_APO_ATP_1: Order Due List (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, the following
functions are available for order due lists (ODLs):
- Selection of ODLs by customer in the ODL monitor
In the ODL monitor (Process Order Due Lists report) you can select ODLs by customer
information.
To start the ODL monitor, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Advanced Planning and
Optimization -> Global ATP -> Backorder Processing -> Event-Driven Quantity Assignment
(EDQA) -> Process Order Due Lists.
- Global processing of ODLs
You can change the priority of an order item or delete an order item on a global level. Global
processing means that these changes affect all ODLs that include the order item.
- ODL overview
You can use the Order Due List Overview report to display order items that correspond to your
selection criteria.
To start the report, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Advanced Planning and
Optimization -> Global ATP -> Backorder Processing -> Event-Driven Quantity Assignment
(EDQA) -> Order Due List Overview.
- Order items with sublocations
You can include order items with sublocations into ODLs.
- Order items with full confirmation
You can include order items with full confirmation into ODLs.
- ODL sequence
The system can evaluate multiple ODLs in a sequence in a process of event-driven quantity
assignment (EDQA). To use this function, you must create one or more ODL sequences.
Effects on Existing Data
The user interface of the Process Order Due Lists report has ben enhanced in the following way:
- The input screen of the report has been enhanced with the Sold-to Location and Ship-to Location
fields.
- The output screen of the report has been enhanced with the Ship-To Party, Sold-to party and
Sublocation fields.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 90
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Effects on Data Transfer
Effects on Customizing
To use the new functions of ODLs, you must make the following settings in Customizing for SAP SCM
under Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Global Available-to-Promise (Global ATP) ->
Event-Driven Quantity Assignment (EDQA):
- To enable global processing or to disable the check of sublocations, use the Customizing activity
Make Settings for Order Due Lists.
- To create ODL sequences, use the Customizing activity Define Order Due List Sequences.
- To enable the use of ODL sequences, use the following Customizing activities:
- Quantity Assignment to Order Due Lists (QODL) -> Define Process Category for Quantity
Assignment to Order Due Lists (QODL)
- Reassignment of Order Confirmations (ROC) -> Define Process Category for
Reassignment of Order Confirmations (ROC)
- To enable the inclusion of items with full confirmations into ODLs, use the Customizing activity
under Quantity Assignment to Order Due Lists (QODL) -> Configure Order Due Lists (Obtain
Confirmation).
See also
For more information, see the main release note for business function SCM-APO-ATP, Usability and
Various Functions.
2.2.15.10 SCM-APO-ATP-EQA Event-Driven Quantity Assignment (EDQA)
2.2.15.10.1 SCM_APO_ATP_1: Event-Driven Quantity Assignment (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, you can use the
following functions of event-driven quantity assignment (EDQA):
- You can edit condition profiles for EDQA using the Edit Condition Profiles report.
In SAP SCM 7.0, you can create and edit condition profiles in Customizing. As of SAP
enhancement package 1 for SAP SCM 7.0, if you activate this business function, you must edit
condition profiles using the Edit Condition Profiles report. With the report you can do the
following:
- Use multiple selection of values or value ranges in the definition of a condition profile
- Exclude multiple values or value ranges in the definition of a condition profile
- Import condition profile settings that you have made before activating the business function
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 91
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
To access the report, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Advanced Planning and
Optimization -> Global ATP -> Backorder Processing -> Event-Driven Quantity Assignment
(EDQA) -> Edit Condition Profiles.
- EDQA can consider sublocations when selecting order items from an order due list (ODL).
To access the report, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Advanced Planning and
Optimization -> Global ATP -> Backorder Processing -> Event-Driven Quantity Assignment
(EDQA) -> Processes of Event-Driven Quantity Assignment.
For more information, see the SCM_APO_ATP_1: Order Due List (New) release note.
- Similarly to confirmations for ERP purchase orders or confirmations for ERP scheduling
agreements in Purchasing, confirmations for APO procurement scheduling agreements that are
received through IDoc trigger the Change purchase order document (POC) activity.
Effects on Existing Data
The user interface of EDQA has been enhanced in the following way:
- In the Customizing activities for defining process categories, the Fields view of the Condition
Profile maintenance view has been hidden. To edit fields, you can use the the Edit Condition
Profiles report.
- The worklist of the Processes of Event-Driven Quantity Assignment report has been enhanced
with the Sublocation field.
Effects on Customizing
To create condition profiles, use the following activities in Customizing for SAP SCM under Advanced
Planning and Optimization -> Global Available-to-Promise (Global ATP) -> Event-Driven
Quantity Assignment (EDQA):
- Quantity Assignment to Order Due Lists (QODL) -> Define Process Category for Quantity
Assignment to Order Due Lists (QODL)
- Reassignment of Order Confirmations (ROC) -> Define Process Category for Reassignment of
Order Confirmations (ROC)
- Other Process Categories -> Define Process Category for Push Deployment
- Other Process Categories -> Define Process Category for Backorder Processing
- Other Process Categories -> Define Process Category for Stock History
See also
For more information about the business function, see the main release note for business function
SCM-APO-ATP, Usability and Various Functions.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 92
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
2.3 SCM-BAS SCM Basis
2.3.1 SCM_APO_HIER_AGG_PLAN: Time-Dependent Location Product
Hierarchies (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, you can use the
following enhancements in time-dependent location product hierarchies:
- You can manually create time-dependent location product hierarchies. To do this, you have to create
a validity period and assign it to a location product.
- You can create, display, and change validity periods.
- You can assign a validity period to a location product, display the time-dependent settings of a
location product, and change the time-dependent settings of a location product.
- You can reorganize time-dependent location products
Effects on Existing Data
The following menu entries have been added to the SAP Easy Access screen:
- SCM Basis -> Master Data -> Hierarchy -> Maintain Validity Periods for Time-Dependent
Location Products
- SCM Basis -> Master Data -> Hierarchy -> Maintain Time-Dependent Location Products
- SCM Basis -> Master Data -> Hierarchy -> Reorganize Time-Dependent Location Products
Effects on Customizing
You make the Customizing settings for this function in Customizing for SCM Basis under the following
Customizing activities:
- Master Data -> Hierarchy -> Define Hierarchy Structure
- Master Data -> Hierarchy -> BAdI: Reading of Time-Dependent Location Product
Hierarchies
See also
For more information, see the main release note for business function SCM-APO, Aggregated Planning
in DP, SNP and CTM (New)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 93
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
2.3.2 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Assignment of Products to a BOD Improvement
(New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, the report
Assignment of Products to a BOD (/SAPAPO/MULTIPROD_ASGN_BOD) is improved in a way
that if there are more than one missing location products in a bill of distribution, it adds them to the
application log and then continues processing the rest of the location products. In previous releases, the
report stopped if there was a missing location product, which caused delays in the assignment of large
numbers of location products. Also, since the report stopped at the first missing location product,
customers had no means of finding out how many location products were missing altogether. This
improvement now solves both problems.
2.3.3 SCM-BAS-SCH Configurable Process Scheduling
2.3.3.1 SCM_APO_ATP_1: Configurable Process Scheduling (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, a new BC set is
available. The BC set contains the SCHEDL_MM_RG schema for configurable process scheduling
(CPS).
You can use the SCHEDL_MM_RG schema to schedule stock transport orders with static route
determination in the same way as for liveCache scheduling.
You can only use the SCHEDL_MM_RG schema if you are using an ERP system for an OLTP system as
of SAP ERP 6.0 including SAP enhancement package 5.
Effects on Customizing
You can activate the BC set in Customizing for SCM Basis under Configurable Process Scheduling ->
Scheduling Schema -> Define Schema.
See also
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 94
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
For more information, see the main release note for business function SCM-APO-ATP, Usability and
Various Functions.
2.3.4 SCM-BAS-PSM Planning Service Manager
2.3.4.1 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Trigger Monitoring (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, you can use the
trigger count service to monitor the trigger volumes in the system, and check which triggers were
processed during particular Planning Service Manager (PSM) runs. The statistic is available both in the
application log of the planning service as well as on a user interface where selections can be applied.
Effects on Existing Data
The following user interfaces have been enhanced for trigger monitoring:
On the SAP Easy Access screen, under Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Service Parts
Planning (SPP) -> Environment -> Current Settings -> Planning Service Manager -> Define
Planning Profile, the TrigStat. (Trigger Statistics) field has been added.
On the SAP Easy Access screen, under Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Service Parts
Planning (SPP) -> Environment -> Current Settings -> Service Profiles, the transaction Define
Service Profile for Trigger Count Service has been added.
On the SAP Easy Access screen, under SCM Basis -> Planning Service Manager -> Current
Settings, the transaction Trigger Monitor has been added. You can use this transaction to display the
trigger count that you want to monitor.
On the SAP Easy Access screen, under SCM Basis -> Data Management Layer, the Delete Trigger
Count transaction has been added.
Effects on Customizing
You make the Customizing settings for this function in Customizing, under SCM Basis -> Data
Management Layer -> Triggers (For Planning File Entry) -> Define Service Profile for Trigger
Count Service.
See also
For more information, see SAP Library at http://help.sap.com.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 95
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
2.3.5 SCM-BAS-MD Master Data
2.3.5.1 SCM_APO_DP_SNP_CTM: Freely-Definable Attributes for
Planning-Version-Dependent Location Products (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, you can
maintain freely-definable attributes for planning version-dependent location products.
Effects on Customizing
To maintain freely-definable attributes for planning-version-dependent location products, in Customizing
for SCM Basis, choose Master Data -> Maintain Freely-Definable Attributes.
2.3.5.2 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Selective Version Merge (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, the system
provides a selection possibility for the target version of the attributes of the master data that you want to
merge in transaction Merge Master Data of Inactive Version with Active Version
(/SAPAPO/VM_SPP). This means that the system replaces only the chosen attributes. Previously, the
target attributes were overwritten by the source attributes when you merged versions of master data. This
function makes it possible to select which attributes the system should replace.
Effects on Existing Data
The following user interfaces have been enhanced for selective version merge:
On the SAP Easy Access screen, under Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Master Data ->
Application-Specific Master Data -> Service Parts Planning (SPP) -> Merge Master Data of
Inactive Version with Active Version, the following elements were added:
- Maintain Profile pushbutton
You use this pushbutton to select the fields, attributes, profiles you want the system to use in the
merge.
- Product Fields field
You use this field to select the version-dependent location product-related fields.
- Location Fields field
You use this field to select the version-dependent location-related fields.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 96
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Transportation Lane Fields field
You use this field to select the version-dependent transportation lane-related fields.
2.3.5.3 SCM_SCMB_TM_FND1: Foundation of External Transportation
Management System
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP SCM Basis 7.0, the business function Foundation of External
Transportation Management System is available. Previously, you could transfer customer and vendor
header level data, for example the address, from an ERP system to the business partner in SCM Basis of a
SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) system using the core interface (CIF). However, many
scenarios, for example those of an external transportation management (TM) system, use
organization-specific customer data definitions from the ERP system, such as company- or
sales-organization-specific partner settings and priorities, that are not transferred using CIF. You can use
the business function to transfer specific attributes of customer and vendor data from an ERP system to a
business partner in SCM Basis using CIF. You can use the customer and vendor data as follows:
- If you have manually created an organizational structure in SCM Basis, you can use the customer
and vendor data to maintain a company organization that corresponds to the company code in an
ERP system and is used by, for example, Transportation Charge Management for invoicing and
charge calculation. You can also, for example, create a corporate organization that groups all
company organizations.
- You can maintain specific attributes of the customer and supplier in the business partner master.
Furthermore, the SCM Basis location master has been extended to maintain international address
versions.
For more information, see the following release notes:
- Business Partner
- International Address Versions
See also
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 97
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
SAP Library for SCM Basis on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com under SAP Supply Chain
Management -> Business Functions (SAP Enhancement Package 1 for SAP SCM 7.0) ->
Business Functions in SAP SCM -> Business Functions in SAP SCM Basis -> Foundation of
External Transportation Management System.
2.3.5.4 SCM-BAS-MD-HI Hierarchy
2.3.5.4.1 SCM_APO_SPP_GEN_1: Flexible Bill of Distribution (BOD) (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 7.0, you can use the
flexible BOD function in Service Parts Planning (SPP).
There are two ways of handling BODs in the system:
- Static BOD
- Flexible BOD (available as of EHP 1 for SAP SCM 7.0)
Static BOD was the only logic the system used up to SAP SCM 7.0. In the case of static BOD, a BOD
can only be assigned to a product if the product exists in all of the locations of the BOD as a location
product.
Flexible BOD simplifies the maintenance of BODs and their assignment to products in Service Parts
Planning. In the case of Flexible BOD, the restriction that the product must exist as location product at all
locations of the BOD that is being assigned to it no longer holds. Consuming applications consider the
product at only those locations of the BOD where it exists as location product. The following restrictions
must be observed to maintain the consistency of the BOD:
- If a location product exists at a certain BOD location, a location product for the product must also
exist at the parent location of this BOD location.
- A location product must exist at one entry point of the BOD at least.
- If a location has a virtual child location in the BOD, but no location product of the product exist at
any of its physical child locations, the virtual child location is considered as a location without
location product.
This enhancement can greatly reduce the number of BODs needed for distribution network modeling in
the SPP system.
The two options do not exist simultaneously in the system, you must choose between them and make the
relevant settings.
To use this function, you must make a Customizing setting as described in the Effects on Customizing
section below.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 98
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Effects on Customizing
You make the Customizing settings for this function in Customizing, under SCM Basis -> Master Data
-> Hierarchy -> Define Bill of Distribution (BOD) Type. The system uses the flexible BOD function
only if you select Flexible BOD in the BOD Type field.
See also
For more information see the SAP Library at http://help.sap.com.
2.3.5.5 SCM-BAS-MD-LO Location
2.3.5.5.1 SCM_SCMB_TM_FND1: Business Partner (Enhanced)
Use
Previously, you could transfer customer and vendor header level data, such as the address, from an ERP
system to SCM Basis using the core interface (CIF). As of enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain
Management (SAP SCM), the following new features are available:
- You can create organizational structures in SCM Basis that you can use in the HR Organization and
Staffing Tool of an external Transportation Management system, for example to maintain company
organizations.
- You can transfer specific attributes of customer and vendor data from an ERP system to a business
partner in SCM Basis using CIF.
Effects on Existing Data
The following new tab pages have been added to the business partner master (transaction BP) for the
customer business partner roles Sold-to-Party (CRM000) and Ship-To-Party (CRM002):
- Customer Data
- Customer Company Organizational Data
- Customer Organizational Data
- Customer Partner Functions
The following new tab pages have been added to the business partner master (transaction BP) for the
vendor business partner roles Vendor (BBP000) and Carrier (CRM010):
- Vendor Data
- Vendor Company Organizational Data
- Vendor Organizational Data
- Vendor Partner Functions
Effects on Customizing
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 99
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
You make settings in the following activities in Customizing for SCM Basis under Master Data ->
Business Partner to validate field entries when maintaining business partner data:
- Define Transportation Service Level Codes
- Map ERP Shipping Conditions to Transp. Serv. Level Codes
- Define Industry Keys
- Define Terms of Payment
- Define Customer Account Groups
- Define Vendor Account Groups
- Define Business Partner Functions
- Define Delivery Priorities
2.3.5.5.2 SCM_SCMB_TM_FND1: International Address Versions (New)
Use
As of enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM), you can use international
address versions for location addresses. If the customer and vendor have international address versions
maintained in the SAP ERP system, the international address versions are automatically transferred with
the customer and vendor data from the SAP ERP system to SCM Basis using CIF.
Effects on Existing Data
On the Address tab page of the location master (transaction /SAPAPO/LOC3), the International
Versions pushbutton is now displayed to show the international address versions of the address.
Effects on Customizing
You have activated the international versions of the address that you want to use in Customizing for SAP
NetWeaver under Application Server -> Basis Services -> Address Management -> International
Settings -> Activate International Address Versions.
2.3.5.5.3 SCM_SCMB_TR_NETWORK: Geocoding (Enhanced)
Use
Previously, in the standard system you could only connect to the geo-service provider PTV eServer
geocoding program delivered with SAP Supply Chain Management to determine geocoordinates. Only
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 100
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
one set of geocoordinates was available for a location. As of enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply
Chain Management (SAP SCM), the following enhancements are available for geocoding:
- You can create your own geocoding strategies using the process controller framework to connect to
different geo-service providers. This allows you to use various strategies for geocoding that suit
your needs.
- You can define geocoding levels that allow you to store geocoordinates for the address of a location
on different levels of detail, for example by house number, postal code, or region. Having different
levels of detail for the geocoordinates of a location, allows you to improve the performance of the
distance and duration determination between locations.
Effects on System Administration
You use the Mass Geocoding report to determine geocoordinates for multiple locations. You use the
Delete Obsolete Geocoordinates report to delete geocoordinates that have become obsolete as a
consequence of geocoding levels that have been deleted in the system. To run scheduled jobs for these
reports, you can use the Mass Geocoding in Batch and Delete Obsolete Geocoordinates in Batch
reports.
You can access these reports on the SAP Easy Access screen for SCM Basis under Master Data ->
Location -> Geocoding.
Effects on Customizing
You have defined geocoding levels and assigned geocoding strategies to them. You define geocoding
levels in Customizing for SCM Basis under Master Data -> Location -> Geocoding -> Define
Geocoding Levels.
To create strategies for geocoding different from the strategies in the standard system, you can use the
process controller. For more information, see the Customizing activity Configure Process Controller for
Geocoding.
See also
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Chain Management on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com under SCM Basis -> Master Data -> Location -> Geocoding.
2.3.5.5.4 SCM_SCMB_TR_NETWORK: Enhanced Services for Transportation
Network
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP SCM Basis 7.0, the business function Enhanced Services for
Transportation Network is available. With this business function, you can improve the geographical
services used in Transportation Network for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM).
Accurate geographical data can help to improve the quality of many features in SAP SCM applications,
such as determining geocoordinates for locations, determining distances and durations between locations,
and so on. The following functions have been enhanced and improved:
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 101
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Geocoding
- Distance and duration determination
For more information, see the following release notes:
- Geocoding
- Distance and Duration Determination
See also
SAP Library for SCM Basis on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com under SAP Supply Chain
Management -> Business Functions (SAP Enhancement Package 1 for SAP SCM 7.0) ->
Business Functions in SAP SCM -> Business Functions in SAP SCM Basis -> Enhanced
Services for Transportation Network.
2.3.5.6 SCM-BAS-MD-TL Transportation Lanes, TDL Profile and Planning
Cost
2.3.5.6.1 SCM_SCMB_TR_NETWORK: Distance and Duration Determination
(Enhanced)
Use
As of enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM), the following
enhancements are available for the distance and duration determination (DDD):
- You can fill the DDD buffer more efficiently and delete buffered distances and durations from the
DDD buffer.
- You can use the process controller to create strategies for the DDD. For more information, see the
Customizing activity Configure Process Controller for Geocoding.
Effects on System Administration
To precalculate distances and duration for the DDD buffer, you can use the Precalculation of Distance
and Duration Determination report. To delete obsolete entries from the DDD buffer, you can use the
Deletion of Buffered Distances and Durations report. To run scheduled jobs for these reports, you can
use the Precalculation of Distance and Duration Determination in Batch and the Deletion of
Buffered Distances and Durations in Batch reports.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 102
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
You can access these reports on the SAP Easy Access screen for SCM Basis under Master Data ->
Transportation Lane -> Distance and Duration Determination.
Effects on Customizing
To use the enhanced distance and duration determination, you have made the following settings:
- You have defined a GIS zone that groups together a set of countries that the GIS provider
specializes in. The GIS zone is necessary for defining DDD strategies. To define the GIS zone, use
the Customizing activity Define GIS Zone.
- You have assigned countries to GIS zones. To assign countries to GIS zones, use the Customizing
activity Assign Country to GIS Zone.
- You have defined DDD strategies for a more precise determination of distances and durations. To
define DDD strategies, use the Customizing activity Define Strategy for Distance and Duration
Determination.
- You have made global settings for the buffering of the distance and duration determination. To
make the settings, use the Customizing activity Maintain Global Settings for Buffering of DDD.
See also
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Chain Management on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com under SCM Basis -> Master Data -> Transportation Lane -> Distance and
Duration Determination.
2.3.5.6.2 SCM_SCMB_TR_NETWORK: Enhanced Services for Transportation
Network
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP SCM Basis 7.0, the business function Enhanced Services for
Transportation Network is available. With this business function, you can improve the geographical
services used in Transportation Network for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM).
Accurate geographical data can help to improve the quality of many features in SAP SCM applications,
such as determining geocoordinates for locations, determining distances and durations between locations,
and so on. The following functions have been enhanced and improved:
- Geocoding
- Distance and duration determination
For more information, see the following release notes:
- Geocoding
- Distance and Duration Determination
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 103
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
See also
SAP Library for SCM Basis on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com under SAP Supply Chain
Management -> Business Functions (SAP Enhancement Package 1 for SAP SCM 7.0) ->
Business Functions in SAP SCM -> Business Functions in SAP SCM Basis -> Enhanced
Services for Transportation Network.
2.3.6 SCM-BAS-EHS EH&S Services
2.3.6.1 SCM_EHS_DG_CI_1: EH&S Services SCM: Dang. Goods (new)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP SCM Basis 7.0, the business function EH&S Services SCM:
Dang. Goods (SCM_EHS_DG_CI_1) is available. With this business function the dangerous goods
checks component has been extended to include the check method mixed loading checks.
The mixed loading checks determine whether dangerous goods can be loaded together. This requires
checks at different levels and allows regulation-dependent rules and enterprise-specific special cases to be
mapped.
The dangerous goods master dialogue has been extended to include the Mixed Loading tab page.
Effects on Customizing
Customizing for Dangerous Goods Management was extended to include the following IMG activities:
- IMG section Specify Settings for Mixed Loading Checks
- BAdI: Product Exchange / Multiple Component Explosion
- BAdI: Determination of Dangerous Goods Check Schema
The IMG activity Maintain Transportation Mode has been extended by the field Dangerous Goods -
Mode-of-Transport Category.
See also
For more information, see the SAP Help Portal at help.sap.com.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 104
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
2.3.6.2 SCM-BAS-EHS-DG Dangerous Goods Management
2.3.6.2.1 SCM_EHS_DG_CI_1: EH&S Services SCM: Dang. Goods (new)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP SCM Basis 7.0, the business function EH&S Services SCM:
Dang. Goods (SCM_EHS_DG_CI_1) is available. With this business function the dangerous goods
checks component has been extended to include the check method mixed loading checks.
The mixed loading checks determine whether dangerous goods can be loaded together. This requires
checks at different levels and allows regulation-dependent rules and enterprise-specific special cases to be
mapped.
The dangerous goods master dialogue has been extended to include the Mixed Loading tab page.
Effects on Customizing
Customizing for Dangerous Goods Management was extended to include the following IMG activities:
- IMG section Specify Settings for Mixed Loading Checks
- BAdI: Product Exchange / Multiple Component Explosion
- BAdI: Determination of Dangerous Goods Check Schema
The IMG activity Maintain Transportation Mode has been extended by the field Dangerous Goods -
Mode-of-Transport Category.
See also
For more information, see the SAP Help Portal at help.sap.com.
2.4 SCM-EWM Extended Warehouse Management
2.4.1 SCM_EWM_REV_LOG: Business Function EWM, Returns in the
Distribution Network (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM) 7.0, the
business function EWM, Returns in the Distribution Network (SCM_EWM_REV_LOG) is available.
With this business function you can:
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 105
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Handle items that additionally arrive in the warehouse without having a corresponding document
flow in the system
- Return items that have been received wrongly or in a bad quality initiated by a stock transport order
(STO)
- Post inspection decisions and follow-up actions separately
- Cancel an inspection decision
Delivery
The following functions have been enhanced with the new fixed values C (All Allowed Activities for
Stock Transport Order) and D (All Allowed Activities for Return Stock Transport Order) of existing
field Act. Q. Insp. (Control f. Activities Q. Insp.). The control indicator for quality inspection activities
at item level can be entered when the inbound delivery is changed or created. The new values are used in
the cases of stock transport order or returns stock transport order (rSTO).
- Maintain Inbound Delivery Notification
On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse Management -> Delivery
Processing -> Inbound Delivery -> Maintain Inbound Delivery Notification.
- Maintain Inbound Delivery
On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse Management -> Delivery
Processing -> Inbound Delivery -> Maintain Inbound Delivery.
Quality Inspection
The functions have been enhanced with a new button to support an explicit decision.
- The quality inspection and count function has been enhanced with the decide button:
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse Management
-> Execution -> Quality Inspection and Count.
- The quality inspection within the RF environment has been enhanced with the decide button:
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse Management
-> Execution -> Log on to RF Environment.
Effects on Customizing
Making a separate posting of decision and follow-up action and a cancellation of a decided inspection
available in the settings in Customizing for Extended Warehouse Management has been enhanced with
two additional checkboxes:
Choose Extended Warehouse Management ->Cross-Process Settings -> Basics ->
Warehouse-Dependent Activation for Inspection Object Types
For Returns in the Distribution Network, make the following settings in Customizing for Extended
Warehouse Management:
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 106
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Extended Warehouse Management -> Interfaces -> ERP Integration -> General Settings ->
Set Control Parameters for ERP Version Controland set the Create InbDel. field for a Plant as
a Vendor in the section Create/Delete Inbound Deliveries section.
If you use Returns in the Distribution Network, you can use the following Business Add-Ins (BAdIs):
- Extended Warehouse Management -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Extended Warehouse
Management -> Cross-Process Settings -> Quality Management -> Follow-Up Actions ->
BAdI: Create Purchase Order
2.4.2 SCM_EWM_TRANS_INT_1: Business Function EWM, Integration with
Transportation (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM) 7.0, the
business function EWM, Integration with Transportation (SCM_EWM_TRANS_INT_1) is available.
You can use this business function to integrate the Transportation (LE-TRA) component of SAP ERP 6.0
with EWM. With this integration, you can control and monitor the entire transportation process from the
planning stage to the goods receipt or goods issue.
For more information, see the business function description.
Effects on Existing Data
For more information, see the SCM_EWM_TRANS_INT_1: Effects on the User Interface (New) release
note.
Effects on Customizing
You can use the following BC Sets:
- /SCWM/DLV_INBOUND_TRANSP_INT
You can use this BC Set to adapt the inbound delivery document and item types for the
transportation integration.
- /SCWM/DLV_OUTBOUND_TRANSP_INT
You can use this BC Set to adapt the outbound delivery document and item types for the
transportation integration.
For the integration with the Transportation component, the following activities are available in
Customizing for Extended Warehouse Management:
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 107
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Goods Receipt Process -> Inbound Delivery -> Integration with Transportation -> Define
Transportation Planning Type (Inbound)
In this Customizing activity, you can define the transportation planning type for inbound delivery
processing.
- Goods Receipt Process -> Inbound Delivery -> Integration with Transportation -> Allow
EWM Execution Without Transportation Planning (Inbound)
In this Customizing activity, you can enable the manual release of an inbound delivery for execution
in EWM before the results of the transportation planning are available.
- Goods Issue Process-> Outbound Delivery -> Integration with Transportation -> Define
Transportation Planning Type (Outbound)
In this Customizing activity, you can define the transportation planning type for outbound delivery
processing.
- Goods Issue Process-> Outbound Delivery -> Integration with Transportation -> Allow
EWM Execution Without Transportation Planning (Outbound)
In this Customizing activity, you can enable the manual release of an outbound delivery for
execution in EWM before the results of the transportation planning are available.
- Interfaces -> ERP Integration -> Define Default Values for IDoc Outbound
In this Customizing activity, you can define default values that are needed in the IDocs sent from
EWM to SAP ERP.
- Goods Issue Process -> Define Consolidation Group
In this Customizing activity, you define the delivery values from which the consolidation group
should be determined for the delivery item in shipping. For this business function, this Customizing
activity has been enhanced with the Door (Access via Door) field.
For the integration with Transportation component, the following Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) are
available in Customizing for Extended Warehouse Management under Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for
Extended Warehouse Management:
- Cross-Process Settings -> Delivery Processing -> BAdI: Determination of Transportation
Planning Type
You can use this BAdI to determine the transportation planning type in more detail than for the
combination of a warehouse number, a document category, a document type, and a business system.
- Interfaces -> ERP Integration -> Inbound Messages from ERP System to EWM -> BAdI:
IDoc Inbound of ERP Message SHPMNT Before Processing
You can use this BAdI to process your own data passed through the IDoc SHPMNT05.
- Interfaces -> ERP Integration -> Inbound Messages from ERP System to EWM -> BAdI:
Change of IDoc Control and Segment Data Before Conversion
You can use this BAdI to change IDoc control and IDoc segment data before an application-specific
conversion takes place.
- Interfaces -> ERP Integration -> Inbound Messages from ERP System to EWM -> BAdI:
IDoc Inbound Error Handling of ERP Message SHPMNT
You can use this BAdI to decide whether an error can be ignored and the IDoc can be stored.
- Interfaces -> ERP Integration -> Outbound Messages from EWM to ERP System -> BAdI:
IDoc Outbound of ERP Message SHPMNT
You can use this BAdI to attach your own data to the SHPMNT05 IDoc before the import of IDoc
data into SAP ERP.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 108
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Interfaces -> ERP Integration -> Outbound Messages from EWM to ERP System -> BAdI:
IDoc Outbound of ERP Message SHIPPL
You can use this BAdI to attach your own data to the TPSSHT01 IDoc before the import of IDoc
data into SAP ERP.
- Cross-Process Settings -> Shipping and Receiving -> BAdI: Determine Staging Areas and
Doors
You can use this BAdI to influence the determination rules for the staging areas and doors for both
the goods receipt process and the goods issue process. The Inbound (STADET_IN) method of the
BAdI interface has been enhanced with the following parameters:
- Handling Unit Type for Means of Transport (HUTYPE)
- Means of Transport (MTR)
- Carrier (CARRIER)
- Goods Issue Process -> BAdI: Define Consolidation Group
You can use this BAdI to define consolidation groups. The Import Structure for Determining a
Distribution Group (/SCWM/S_DSTGRP_IMPORT) structure, which is used as the IS_PARAM
importing parameter of the BAdI, has been enhanced with the following fields:
- Warehouse Door (DOOR)
- Internal Number of Transportation Unit (TU_NUM)
The Customizing for Determining the Consolidation Group (/SCWM/TDSTGRP) structure,
which is used as the IS_TDSTGRP importing parameter of the BAdI, has been enhanced with the
Access via Door (FLGDOOD) field.
2.4.3 SCM-EWM-DLP Delivery Processing
2.4.3.1 SCM_EWM_TRANS_INT_1: Effects on the User Interface (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM) 7.0, the
business function EWM, Integration with Transportation (SCM_EWM_TRANS_INT_1) is available
with effects on the user interface.
Effects on Existing Data
Master Data
The Maintain Consolidation Group function has been enhanced with the Warehouse Door field.
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse Management ->
Master Data -> Maintain Consolidation Group.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 109
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Delivery
The user interface of the Delivery component has been enhanced in the following way:
- The following functions have been enhanced with the Transportation Planning Type field
(abbreviated as TransPlanType or TrsPlnType):
- Maintain Inbound Delivery Notification
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Delivery Processing -> Inbound Delivery -> Maintain Inbound Delivery
Notification.
- Maintain Inbound Delivery
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Delivery Processing -> Inbound Delivery -> Maintain Inbound
Delivery.
- Maintain Outbound Delivery Request
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Delivery Processing -> Outbound Delivery -> Maintain Outbound
Delivery Request.
- Maintain Outbound Delivery Order
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Delivery Processing -> Outbound Delivery -> Maintain Outbound
Delivery Order.
- Maintain Outbound Delivery
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Delivery Processing -> Outbound Delivery -> Maintain Outbound
Delivery.
- You can use the TransPl (Transportation Plan) button to set the status to Fixed Manually or Not
Started. The following functions have been enhanced with the TransPl button:
- Maintain Inbound Delivery
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Delivery Processing -> Inbound Delivery -> Maintain Inbound
Delivery.
- Maintain Outbound Delivery Order
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Delivery Processing -> Outbound Delivery -> Maintain Outbound
Delivery Order.
- The Warehouse Management Monitor has been enhanced with the Transportation Planning
Type field under the following:
- Inbound -> Documents -> Inbound Delivery
- Outbound -> Documents -> Outbound Delivery Order
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Monitoring -> Warehouse Management Monitor.
- The Maintain Inbound Delivery function has been enhanced with theTransport Plan (DTD) status
and the Blocked (Transp. Plan) (DBT) status.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 110
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Delivery Processing -> Inbound Delivery -> Maintain Inbound Delivery.
- The Maintain Outbound Delivery Order function has been enhanced with the Blocked (Transp.
Plan) (DBT) status.
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Delivery Processing -> Outbound Delivery -> Maintain Outbound Delivery
Order.
Shipping and Receiving
The user interface of the Shipping and Receiving component has been enhanced in the following way:
- The Staging Area and Door Determination (Inbound) function has been enhanced with the
following fields:
- HU Type (Handling Unit Type for Means of Transport)
- MTr (Means of Transport)
- Carrier (Carrier)
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Settings -> Shipping and Receiving -> Staging Area and Door
Determination (Inbound).
- The Staging Area and Door Determination (Outbound) function has been enhanced with the
following fields:
- HU Type (Handling Unit Type for Means of Transport)
- MTr (Means of Transport)
- Carrier (Carrier)
- Ship-To Pt (Ship-To Party)
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Settings -> Shipping and Receiving -> Staging Area and Door
Determination (Outbound).
- The Access Sequence to Staging Area and Door Determination function has been enhanced
with the following fields:
- HU Type (Access via HU Type of TU Packaging Material)
- MTr (Access via Means of Transport)
- Carrier (Access via Carrier)
- Party (Access via Ship-To Party)
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Settings -> Shipping and Receiving -> Access Sequence to Staging Area
and Door Determination.
- The Warehouse Management Monitor has been enhanced with the Transportation Planning
Type and the Receiver (Receiving logical system) fields under the following:
- Outbound -> Documents -> Shipping Overview -> Transportation Unit Overview Outb.
-> Transportation Unit Header Outbound
- Outbound -> Documents -> Shipping Overview -> Vehicle Overview Outbound ->
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 111
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Vehicle Header Outbound
- Outbound -> Documents -> Processes -> Loading -> Loading view on Transport Unit
- Inbound -> Documents -> Receiving Overview -> Transportation Unit Overview Inbou.
-> Transportation Unit Header Inbound
- Inbound -> Documents -> Receiving Overview -> Vehicle Overview Intbound ->
Vehicle Header Inbound
- Inbound -> Processes -> Unloading Overview -> Unloading per Transport Unit
- Stock and Bin -> Transport Unit (Stock View)
- Stock and Bin -> Yard Management -> Yard Bins -> Transport Units in Yard
- Stock and Bin -> Yard Management -> Yard Doors (currently) -> Door-TU assignment
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Monitoring -> Warehouse Management Monitor.
- The Process Vehicle function has been enhanced with the following fields:
- The header and the Assigned Del. screen area have been enhanced with the Transportation
Planning Type and the Receiver fields.
- The Transportation Unit tab page has been enhanced with the Route Origin (Origin of Route
Master Data) field.
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Shipping and Receiving -> Process Vehicle.
- The Process Transportation Unit function has been enhanced with the following fields:
- The Transportation Unit tab page has been enhanced with the Transportation Planning
Type, the Receiver, and the Route Origin fields.
- The Free Deliveries tab page and the Assigned Del. tab page have been enhanced with the
Transportation Planning Type and the Receiver fields.
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Shipping and Receiving -> Process Transportation Unit.
- The Transportation Unit tab page of the Maintain Door Assignment function has been enhanced
with the Transportation Planning Type and the Receiver fields.
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Shipping and Receiving -> Maintain Door Assignment.
- The header of the Load function has been enhanced with the Route Origin field.
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Shipping and Receiving -> Load.
- The header of the Unload function has been enhanced with the Route Origin field.
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Shipping and Receiving -> Unload.
- The Arrival at/Departure from Checkpoint function has been enhanced with the Transportation
Planning Type, the Receiver, and the Route Origin fields.
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Shipping and Receiving -> Yard Management -> Arrival at/Departure from
Checkpoint.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 112
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- The header of the Create Warehouse Task in Yard function has been enhanced with the Route
Origin field.
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Shipping and Receiving -> Yard Management -> Create Warehouse Task
in Yard.
2.4.4 SCM-EWM-MD Master Data
2.4.4.1 SCM_EWM_TRANS_INT_1: Effects on the User Interface (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM) 7.0, the
business function EWM, Integration with Transportation (SCM_EWM_TRANS_INT_1) is available
with effects on the user interface.
Effects on Existing Data
Master Data
The Maintain Consolidation Group function has been enhanced with the Warehouse Door field.
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse Management ->
Master Data -> Maintain Consolidation Group.
Delivery
The user interface of the Delivery component has been enhanced in the following way:
- The following functions have been enhanced with the Transportation Planning Type field
(abbreviated as TransPlanType or TrsPlnType):
- Maintain Inbound Delivery Notification
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Delivery Processing -> Inbound Delivery -> Maintain Inbound Delivery
Notification.
- Maintain Inbound Delivery
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Delivery Processing -> Inbound Delivery -> Maintain Inbound
Delivery.
- Maintain Outbound Delivery Request
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Delivery Processing -> Outbound Delivery -> Maintain Outbound
Delivery Request.
- Maintain Outbound Delivery Order
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Delivery Processing -> Outbound Delivery -> Maintain Outbound
Delivery Order.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 113
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Maintain Outbound Delivery
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Delivery Processing -> Outbound Delivery -> Maintain Outbound
Delivery.
- You can use the TransPl (Transportation Plan) button to set the status to Fixed Manually or Not
Started. The following functions have been enhanced with the TransPl button:
- Maintain Inbound Delivery
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Delivery Processing -> Inbound Delivery -> Maintain Inbound
Delivery.
- Maintain Outbound Delivery Order
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Delivery Processing -> Outbound Delivery -> Maintain Outbound
Delivery Order.
- The Warehouse Management Monitor has been enhanced with the Transportation Planning
Type field under the following:
- Inbound -> Documents -> Inbound Delivery
- Outbound -> Documents -> Outbound Delivery Order
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Monitoring -> Warehouse Management Monitor.
- The Maintain Inbound Delivery function has been enhanced with theTransport Plan (DTD) status
and the Blocked (Transp. Plan) (DBT) status.
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Delivery Processing -> Inbound Delivery -> Maintain Inbound Delivery.
- The Maintain Outbound Delivery Order function has been enhanced with the Blocked (Transp.
Plan) (DBT) status.
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Delivery Processing -> Outbound Delivery -> Maintain Outbound Delivery
Order.
Shipping and Receiving
The user interface of the Shipping and Receiving component has been enhanced in the following way:
- The Staging Area and Door Determination (Inbound) function has been enhanced with the
following fields:
- HU Type (Handling Unit Type for Means of Transport)
- MTr (Means of Transport)
- Carrier (Carrier)
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Settings -> Shipping and Receiving -> Staging Area and Door
Determination (Inbound).
- The Staging Area and Door Determination (Outbound) function has been enhanced with the
following fields:
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 114
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- HU Type (Handling Unit Type for Means of Transport)
- MTr (Means of Transport)
- Carrier (Carrier)
- Ship-To Pt (Ship-To Party)
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Settings -> Shipping and Receiving -> Staging Area and Door
Determination (Outbound).
- The Access Sequence to Staging Area and Door Determination function has been enhanced
with the following fields:
- HU Type (Access via HU Type of TU Packaging Material)
- MTr (Access via Means of Transport)
- Carrier (Access via Carrier)
- Party (Access via Ship-To Party)
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Settings -> Shipping and Receiving -> Access Sequence to Staging Area
and Door Determination.
- The Warehouse Management Monitor has been enhanced with the Transportation Planning
Type and the Receiver (Receiving logical system) fields under the following:
- Outbound -> Documents -> Shipping Overview -> Transportation Unit Overview Outb.
-> Transportation Unit Header Outbound
- Outbound -> Documents -> Shipping Overview -> Vehicle Overview Outbound ->
Vehicle Header Outbound
- Outbound -> Documents -> Processes -> Loading -> Loading view on Transport Unit
- Inbound -> Documents -> Receiving Overview -> Transportation Unit Overview Inbou.
-> Transportation Unit Header Inbound
- Inbound -> Documents -> Receiving Overview -> Vehicle Overview Intbound ->
Vehicle Header Inbound
- Inbound -> Processes -> Unloading Overview -> Unloading per Transport Unit
- Stock and Bin -> Transport Unit (Stock View)
- Stock and Bin -> Yard Management -> Yard Bins -> Transport Units in Yard
- Stock and Bin -> Yard Management -> Yard Doors (currently) -> Door-TU assignment
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Monitoring -> Warehouse Management Monitor.
- The Process Vehicle function has been enhanced with the following fields:
- The header and the Assigned Del. screen area have been enhanced with the Transportation
Planning Type and the Receiver fields.
- The Transportation Unit tab page has been enhanced with the Route Origin (Origin of Route
Master Data) field.
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 115
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Management -> Shipping and Receiving -> Process Vehicle.
- The Process Transportation Unit function has been enhanced with the following fields:
- The Transportation Unit tab page has been enhanced with the Transportation Planning
Type, the Receiver, and the Route Origin fields.
- The Free Deliveries tab page and the Assigned Del. tab page have been enhanced with the
Transportation Planning Type and the Receiver fields.
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Shipping and Receiving -> Process Transportation Unit.
- The Transportation Unit tab page of the Maintain Door Assignment function has been enhanced
with the Transportation Planning Type and the Receiver fields.
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Shipping and Receiving -> Maintain Door Assignment.
- The header of the Load function has been enhanced with the Route Origin field.
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Shipping and Receiving -> Load.
- The header of the Unload function has been enhanced with the Route Origin field.
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Shipping and Receiving -> Unload.
- The Arrival at/Departure from Checkpoint function has been enhanced with the Transportation
Planning Type, the Receiver, and the Route Origin fields.
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Shipping and Receiving -> Yard Management -> Arrival at/Departure from
Checkpoint.
- The header of the Create Warehouse Task in Yard function has been enhanced with the Route
Origin field.
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Shipping and Receiving -> Yard Management -> Create Warehouse Task
in Yard.
2.4.5 SCM-EWM-SR Shipping and Receiving
2.4.5.1 SCM_EWM_TRANS_INT_1: Effects on the User Interface (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM) 7.0, the
business function EWM, Integration with Transportation (SCM_EWM_TRANS_INT_1) is available
with effects on the user interface.
Effects on Existing Data
Master Data
The Maintain Consolidation Group function has been enhanced with the Warehouse Door field.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 116
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse Management ->
Master Data -> Maintain Consolidation Group.
Delivery
The user interface of the Delivery component has been enhanced in the following way:
- The following functions have been enhanced with the Transportation Planning Type field
(abbreviated as TransPlanType or TrsPlnType):
- Maintain Inbound Delivery Notification
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Delivery Processing -> Inbound Delivery -> Maintain Inbound Delivery
Notification.
- Maintain Inbound Delivery
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Delivery Processing -> Inbound Delivery -> Maintain Inbound
Delivery.
- Maintain Outbound Delivery Request
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Delivery Processing -> Outbound Delivery -> Maintain Outbound
Delivery Request.
- Maintain Outbound Delivery Order
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Delivery Processing -> Outbound Delivery -> Maintain Outbound
Delivery Order.
- Maintain Outbound Delivery
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Delivery Processing -> Outbound Delivery -> Maintain Outbound
Delivery.
- You can use the TransPl (Transportation Plan) button to set the status to Fixed Manually or Not
Started. The following functions have been enhanced with the TransPl button:
- Maintain Inbound Delivery
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Delivery Processing -> Inbound Delivery -> Maintain Inbound
Delivery.
- Maintain Outbound Delivery Order
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Delivery Processing -> Outbound Delivery -> Maintain Outbound
Delivery Order.
- The Warehouse Management Monitor has been enhanced with the Transportation Planning
Type field under the following:
- Inbound -> Documents -> Inbound Delivery
- Outbound -> Documents -> Outbound Delivery Order
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Monitoring -> Warehouse Management Monitor.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 117
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- The Maintain Inbound Delivery function has been enhanced with theTransport Plan (DTD) status
and the Blocked (Transp. Plan) (DBT) status.
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Delivery Processing -> Inbound Delivery -> Maintain Inbound Delivery.
- The Maintain Outbound Delivery Order function has been enhanced with the Blocked (Transp.
Plan) (DBT) status.
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Delivery Processing -> Outbound Delivery -> Maintain Outbound Delivery
Order.
Shipping and Receiving
The user interface of the Shipping and Receiving component has been enhanced in the following way:
- The Staging Area and Door Determination (Inbound) function has been enhanced with the
following fields:
- HU Type (Handling Unit Type for Means of Transport)
- MTr (Means of Transport)
- Carrier (Carrier)
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Settings -> Shipping and Receiving -> Staging Area and Door
Determination (Inbound).
- The Staging Area and Door Determination (Outbound) function has been enhanced with the
following fields:
- HU Type (Handling Unit Type for Means of Transport)
- MTr (Means of Transport)
- Carrier (Carrier)
- Ship-To Pt (Ship-To Party)
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Settings -> Shipping and Receiving -> Staging Area and Door
Determination (Outbound).
- The Access Sequence to Staging Area and Door Determination function has been enhanced
with the following fields:
- HU Type (Access via HU Type of TU Packaging Material)
- MTr (Access via Means of Transport)
- Carrier (Access via Carrier)
- Party (Access via Ship-To Party)
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Settings -> Shipping and Receiving -> Access Sequence to Staging Area
and Door Determination.
- The Warehouse Management Monitor has been enhanced with the Transportation Planning
Type and the Receiver (Receiving logical system) fields under the following:
- Outbound -> Documents -> Shipping Overview -> Transportation Unit Overview Outb.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 118
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
-> Transportation Unit Header Outbound
- Outbound -> Documents -> Shipping Overview -> Vehicle Overview Outbound ->
Vehicle Header Outbound
- Outbound -> Documents -> Processes -> Loading -> Loading view on Transport Unit
- Inbound -> Documents -> Receiving Overview -> Transportation Unit Overview Inbou.
-> Transportation Unit Header Inbound
- Inbound -> Documents -> Receiving Overview -> Vehicle Overview Intbound ->
Vehicle Header Inbound
- Inbound -> Processes -> Unloading Overview -> Unloading per Transport Unit
- Stock and Bin -> Transport Unit (Stock View)
- Stock and Bin -> Yard Management -> Yard Bins -> Transport Units in Yard
- Stock and Bin -> Yard Management -> Yard Doors (currently) -> Door-TU assignment
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Monitoring -> Warehouse Management Monitor.
- The Process Vehicle function has been enhanced with the following fields:
- The header and the Assigned Del. screen area have been enhanced with the Transportation
Planning Type and the Receiver fields.
- The Transportation Unit tab page has been enhanced with the Route Origin (Origin of Route
Master Data) field.
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Shipping and Receiving -> Process Vehicle.
- The Process Transportation Unit function has been enhanced with the following fields:
- The Transportation Unit tab page has been enhanced with the Transportation Planning
Type, the Receiver, and the Route Origin fields.
- The Free Deliveries tab page and the Assigned Del. tab page have been enhanced with the
Transportation Planning Type and the Receiver fields.
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Shipping and Receiving -> Process Transportation Unit.
- The Transportation Unit tab page of the Maintain Door Assignment function has been enhanced
with the Transportation Planning Type and the Receiver fields.
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Shipping and Receiving -> Maintain Door Assignment.
- The header of the Load function has been enhanced with the Route Origin field.
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Shipping and Receiving -> Load.
- The header of the Unload function has been enhanced with the Route Origin field.
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Shipping and Receiving -> Unload.
- The Arrival at/Departure from Checkpoint function has been enhanced with the Transportation
Planning Type, the Receiver, and the Route Origin fields.
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 119
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Management -> Shipping and Receiving -> Yard Management -> Arrival at/Departure from
Checkpoint.
- The header of the Create Warehouse Task in Yard function has been enhanced with the Route
Origin field.
To use the function, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extended Warehouse
Management -> Shipping and Receiving -> Yard Management -> Create Warehouse Task
in Yard.
2.5 SCM-EM Event Management
2.5.1 SCM_EM_HIGHVOL: Archiving Improvements (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Event Management 7.0, business function EM, Archiving and
Web Interface Improvements (SCM_EM_HIGHVOL), you can use a combined archiving concept for
event handlers and event messages that supports processes with extremely high data volumes. Event
handler sets are not supported. In detail, this archiving concept comprises the following:
- New archiving objects for event handlers and event messages:
- SAPTRX_EH Event Handler in Event Management
- SAPTRX_EVM Event Messages in Event Management
- Display of archived data on the Web user interface, for example, on the list screen or on the detail
screen
Event handler hierarchies are archived together with the event handlers and can be displayed. The
display of event messages from superior event handlers in the hierarchy is not possible.
- Display of already archived events although the corresponding event handler is not archived.
Definition of Archiving Profiles and Archiving Sequences
In archiving you can define an archiving profile and an archiving sequence. This affects the way how data
is retrieved from the database as well as the display of archived data on the Web user interface, for
example. After you have saved the archiving sequence, you cannot change it anymore because this could
lead to data inconsistencies.
If you want to display already archived event handler and event message data, you have to create an
archiving profile for the related Web user interface and to assign it to a user profile.
For more information, see Customizing for SAP Event Management under Event Management -> Archive
and Delete SAP Event Management Objects -> Define Archiving Profile for Querying Archive Files or
Define Archiving Sequence for SAP Event Management Objects.
Definition of User Profiles
You can assign the archiving profile to a user profile, for example, to display already archived event
handler and event message data.
For more information, see Customizing for SAP Event Management under Event Management -> Event
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 120
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Messages, Status Queries, and Web Interface -> Web Interface -> Define User Profiles.
Definition of Residence Times
The residence times can be defined via the already existing Customizing transaction Define Residence
Times for Archiving and Deleting. Here the new Event Handler: Update Date residence time check for
event handler archiving is available. That means every new event message processing for an inactive
event handler is retriggering the residence time. The event handlers are only archived if the residence
time is passed.
Effects on Customizing
Access of Archived Data
- If you want to access archived data from the Web user interface or the SAP Event Management
interfaces, you must have done the following in Customizing for SAP Event Management:
- Set up appropriate archive information structures for the new archiving objects with the
Archive Retrieval Configurator (transaction SARJ).
- Define Archiving Profiles for Querying and Displaying Archive Files.
- Define User Profiles and assign the archiving profile to the user profile that is linked to the
Web interface transaction, on which you want to display archived data.
Additionally, you can define an archiving sequence for SAP Event Management objects. For more
information, see Customizing for SAP Event Management under Event Management -> Archive and
Delete SAP Event Management Objects.
Use of New Archiving Concept
- If you want to use the new archiving concept, you can use the following enhancements in
Customizing for SAP Event Management:
- Enhancements for Event Handler Archiving
For more information, see Customizing for SAP Event Management under Event Management
-> Business Add-Ins for SAP Event Management -> Enhancements for Event Handler
Archiving.
- Enhancements for Event Message Archiving
For more information, see Customizing for SAP Event Management under Event Management
-> Business Add-Ins for SAP Event Management -> Enhancements for Event Message
Archiving.
See also
For more information, see SAP Help Portal at SAP Business Suite -> SAP Supply Chain Management ->
SAP Event Management -> Data Archiving.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 121
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
2.5.2 SCM_EM_HIGHVOL: Performance Optimizations (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Event Management 7.0, business function EM, Archiving and
Web Interface Improvements (SCM_EM_HIGHVOL), you can use performance improvements, which
supports processes with extremely high data volumes, which are tailored to specific applications, for
example, item tracking of finished goods.
Usage of the Related New Archiving Concept
For more information, see SCM_EM_HIGHVOL: Archiving Improvements (New).
Various concepts are introduced, which help to reduce the required space for data storage as well as to
optimize the data access during a query.
Suppress Creation of Query IDs
If it is unnecessary in a scenario, you can suppress the creation of a default query ID. Customer defined
query IDs cannot be suppressed.
Suppress Storing of Irrelevant Entries in Table /SAPTRX/EH_EVMSG
If an event message is evaluated as irrelevant during rule processing by using rule activity
QUIT_EVM_PROCESSING, you can suppress the creation of the related entry in table
/SAPTRX/EH_EVMSG.
Effects on Customizing
If you want to improve the performance, you can do the following in Customizing for SAP Event
Management:
- Suppress the creation of default query IDs for event handlers.
The creation of query IDs is not necessary in every scenario. Currently one query ID is created for
every event handler per default for the corresponding application object ID. If you do not want the
creation of the default query ID, you can set Do Not Create Default Query ID for Event Handler.
Customer defined query IDs cannot be suppressed.
For more information, see Customizing for SAP Event Management under Event Management ->
Event Handlers and Event Handler Data -> Event Handlers -> Define Event Handler Types.
- Suppress storing of irrelevant entries in table /SAPTRX/EH_EVMSG by using the Do not store
irrelevant entries activity parameter in the QUIT_EVM_PROCESSING rule activity in Customizing
for SAP Event Management under Event Management -> Reactions to Event Messages -> Define
Rule Sets.
See also
For more information, see SAP Help Portal at SAP Business Suite -> SAP Supply Chain Management ->
SAP Event Management -> Data Archiving.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 122
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
2.5.3 SCM_EM_HIGHVOL: Business Function EM, Archiving and Web Interface
Improvements (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Event Management 7.0, the business function EM, Archiving
and Web Interface Improvements is available. With this business function you can use features for
high-volume processing and archiving in SAP Event Management. This is especially helpful in processes
where a comparably high number of objects are affected by an event, for example, reporting a packing
hierarchy during item tracking.
For more information, see the following release notes:
- SCM_EM_HIGHVOL: Archiving Improvements (New)
- SCM_EM_HIGHVOL: Performance Optimizations (New)
Furthermore, you can use the following enhancements to the user interface (Web Dynpro ABAP):
- On the user interface (Web Dynpro ABAP) you can store your most common search criteria with
Save Search As. The system saves your search criteria in the database and adds the new saved search
name to the Saved Searches dropdown list box. If the search screen contains any date fields, the
system first displays the Save Search Criteria window in which you can define dynamic date
calculation rules. The system copies the operator for a dynamic date calculation from the selection
screen. The system does not support ranges that include or exclude dates in a dynamic date
calculation. The only exception to this is where you can use Current Date +/- NNN Days as a
dynamic date calculation. When you choose the OK button in the Save Search Criteria window, the
system then saves your search criteria and adds the new saved search name to the Saved Searches
dropdown list box. The dropdown list box displays all saved searches depending on the tracking
scenario you have chosen.
If you want to change the search criteria of an existing saved search, you can do the following:
- Choose the relevant saved search in the Saved Searches dropdown list box
- Change the criteria as appropriate
- Save the search criteria under the same name
If you had already defined dynamic date calculation rules for date fields, you must define and save
the rules again.
- On the user interface (Web Dynpro ABAP) you can display search helps to fields on the search
screen and the event message entry. This enables the system to display your own values in addition
to the existing capabilities for SAP Event Management data.
Effects on Customizing
Assignment of Search Helps
If you want to display a search help to a configured field for selection or event messages, you must have
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 123
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
done the assignment of the search help under Configure Fields for User Profiles in Customizing for SAP
Event Management.
See also
For more information about data archiving for high data volumes, see SAP Library for SAP Event
Management on SAP Help Portal at http://www.help.sap.com under Business Functions for SAP Event
Management -> EM, Archiving and Web Interface Improvements.
2.5.4 AIE_OER_PTACOLDCHAIN: Business Function OER, Perf.-Opt. PTA/Cold
Chain (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Event Management 7.0, the business function OER,
Performance-Optimized PTA and Cold Chain is available. This business function is only supported if you
are not already using an existing SAP object event repository but are implementing SAP object event
repository for the first time in your system landscape. That is, you are not using data that already exists
in SAP object event repository in your business processes. With this business function you can use two
new variants of the secure tracking and tracing business scenario: High Volume Product Tracking and
Authentication Visibility Process and Product Tracking and Authentication and Cold Chain Monitoring
Visibility Process, which are a modified versions of the existing, fully standard EPCIS-compliant secure
tracking and tracing business scenario.
- The High Volume Product Tracking and Authentication Visibility Process enables SAP object event
repository (SAP OER) to support the secure tracking and tracing business scenario (EPCIS Capture
and Query interface) for extremely high volume and high performance applications including
archiving. The capture and query interfaces now allow the processing of IDs of any format, and an
access of archived data in addition to data residing on the database. The new query
SimpleEventQueryWithArchive offers the possibility to query and retrieve data transparently from
the archive and the database through the EPCIS query interface.
Note
Consider the following implications when using this new visibility process:
- IDs can have a maximum length of 50 characters
- ID mapping is no longer used for EPCs, business transaction IDs, and business location IDs
You can use the display of internal and external formats for values that are subject to the ID
mapping, such as business steps, disposition codes, and business transaction types. For
example, you can use such values for authorization purposes. For more information, see
Customizing for SAP Auto-ID Infrastructure under Settings for SAP OER -> Master Data ->
Vocabularies - ID Mapping -> Display Internal and External Formats of EPCIS Vocabulary.
- Extraction of secure tracking and tracing business scenario data to SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence is not preconfigured
- The Product Tracking and Authentication and Cold Chain Monitoring Visibility Process enhances
the new high performance secure tracking and tracing business scenario with new functions for cold
chain monitoring.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 124
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Note
This business function uses the basic functions provided in the business function EM, Archiving and Web
Interface Improvements. For more information, see SCM_EM_HIGHVOL: Business Function EM,
Archiving and Web Interface Improvements (New).
Effects on Customizing
- You can assign one archiving profile for ID tracking and one for document tracking ( Assign
Archiving Profiles).
- You cannot use method SET_EPC_PATTERN_LIMIT of Business Add-In (BAdI)
/SAPTRX/BADI_EVT_QUERY because it is not called anymore in the standard coding.
- You can use the Business Add-In BAdI: Processing of Archived Event Handlers to implement the
processing of IDs for which event handlers have already been archived.
If you want to use the new variants of the secure tracking and tracing business scenario, you can use the
relevant Customizing settings with the prefix CCM10_ and PTA30_.
See also
For more information about archiving in SAP object event repository, see SAP Library for SAP Event
Management on SAP Help Portal at http://www.help.sap.com under Business Functions for SAP Object
Event Repository -> OER, Performance-Optimized PTA and Cold Chain.
2.5.5 SCM_EM_TMCONTENT01: EM, Visibility Proc. for External Transportation
Mgmt System (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Event Management 7.0, the business function EM, Visibility
Proc. for External Transportation Mgmt System is available. With this business function, you can use
SAP Event Management for specific scenarios that are managed in an external transportation
management system. You can monitor different event handler types, for example, freight units and freight
orders. Depending on your role in the transportation process you can choose different layouts for the user
interface, such as shipper or consignee.
Effects on Customizing
If you want to use this visibility process, use the relevant Customizing settings with the prefix ODT20_.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 125
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
2.6 SCM-ICH Supply Network Collaboration
2.6.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Branding (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the SAP
SNC Web user interface (Web UI) can display the logo of a business partner, for example the logo of the
leading business partner's company. The following alternative options are available to you:
- SAP SNC system administration sets the logo for a business partner.
- On the Web UI, a user can upload a logo.
Effects on System Administration
You set up branding in the SAP Easy Access menu under Supply Network Collaboration -> Master
Data -> Business Partner -> Define Branding for the SAP SNC Web UI.
To assign a user the authorization to maintain a logo, you need to add BRANDING to the Web screens
the user is authorized to use in the authorization object C_ICH_USER.
See also
For more information, see the main release note for the business function Supply Network
Collaboration 1 (SCM_SNC_GEN_1) and SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP
Help Portal at http://help.sap.com, under SAP Supply Network Collaboration ->
Cross-Application Functions -> Branding the SAP SNC Web UI.
2.6.2 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: SAP SNC Monitoring with CCMS (Enhanced)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the
predefined monitor set SNC Monitor Templates in the Computing Center Management System
(CCMS) has been enhanced with the following nodes:
- Availability
The Availability monitor allows you to monitor the following:
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 126
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Which systems are available and running by using the CCMSPING agent
- The response time of the system
- Number of users logged on
- Connectivity
The Connectivity monitor allows you to monitor inbound and outbound queues for the SAP Core
Interface (CIF) and for SAP NetWeaver Process Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI). It displays faulty
queue entries in the inbound and outbound queues in CIF or PI.
- Transaction Performance
The Transaction Performance monitor allows you to monitor whether planning runs have been
run successfully. You can monitor the following planning runs:
- TLB run
- Replenishment run
- Forecast run
The CIF Master Data Queue Monitor node has been removed. As of SAP enhancement package 1 for
SAP SNC 7.0 the Connectivity monitor performs this function.
Effects on System Administration
To use the SNC Monitor Templates monitor set as a template for your own monitor, copy the desired
monitor and adapt it to your needs. If you run CCMS from a central system to monitor your system
landscape, set up system connections with your SAP SNC systems.
See also
For more information, see the main release note for the business function Supply Network
Collaboration 1 (SCM_SNC_GEN_1) and SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP
Help Portal at http://help.sap.com, under SAP Supply Network Collaboration -> Tools -> SAP
SNC Monitoring with CCMS.
2.6.3 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Collaboration Folders Integration (Enhanced)
Use
Previously in SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC), you could only call Collaboration Folders
(cFolders) for the element Product. As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP SNC 7.0, you can call a
collaboration folder in Collaboration Folders (cFolders) for the following elements on the Purchase
Order Details Web screen and on the Work Order Details Web screen:
- WBS element
- Sales order
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 127
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Production order
On the new Quality Notification Details Web screen, you can call a collaboration folder for quality
notifications.
Effects on Existing Data
UI Enhancements in Work Order Collaboration
The Work Order Details and Work Order History Web screens have been enhanced with fields for the
following numbers:
- WBS element
- Sales order number
- Sales order item number
- Purchase requisition number
- Purchase requisition item number
- Production order number
- Operation number of production order
The numbers are displayed on the new Reference Documents tab page.
UI Enhancements in Purchase Order Collaboration
The Reference Documents tab page on the Purchase Order Details and the Purchase Order
History Web screens have been enhanced with the following fields:
- WBS element
- Purchase requisition number
- Purchase requisition item number
- Production order number
- Operation number of production order
The cFolders pushbutton has changed as follows:
- The label changed from cFolders Product to cFolders
- The button changed from a pushbutton to a pushbutton with drop down
- The entries in the drop down are controlled by means of the Enable a Collaboration in
Collaboration Folders customizing activity
Effects on Data Transfer
The PurchaseOrderERPReplenishmentOrderCollaborationNotification_In service
has been enhanced with the AccountingCodingBlockDistribution element on purchase order
item level to transfer the following data:
- WBS element
- Sales order number
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 128
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Sales order item number
- Production order number/operation number
To transfer the purchase requisition number and purchase requisition item number, the data structure of
the ReplenishmentOrderNotification_In service has been enhanced with the GROUP_ID
element on schedule line level.
Effects on Customizing
You enable the collaboration folder types you want to use in cFolders in Customizing for Supply
Network Collaboration under Basic Settings -> Collaboration Folders -> Enable a Collaboration in
Collaboration Folders.
You can define a path different from the SAP standard delivered path in the folder hierarchy of a
collaboration for cFolders with the Business Add-In (BAdI) Define a Path in a Folder Hierarchy of a
Collaboration in cFolders (/SCF/CFOLDER_STRUCTURE). You define the path in Customizing for
Supply Network Collaboration under Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for SAP SNC -> Basic Settings ->
Collaboration Folders -> BAdI: Define a Path in a Folder Hierarchy of a Collaboration in
cFolders.
See also
For more information, see the main release note for the business function Supply Network
Collaboration 1 (SCM_SNC_GEN_1) and SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP
Help Portal at http://help.sap.com, under SAP Supply Network Collaboration ->
Cross-Application Functions -> Collaboration Folders.
2.6.4 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: BI Extractors (Enhanced)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, there are two
new BI extractors for SAP SNC: an extractor for shipments, and an extractor for quality notifications.
The existing BI extractors for purchase orders and for work order phase lead time have been enhanced as
follows:
- The extractor for purchase orders now extracts data of the following fields:
- Actual Delivered Quantity
- Unit of Measure
- Supplier Confirmed Delivery Date
- The extractor for work order phase lead time now extracts data of the following fields:
- Phase Is Completed
- Event Date/Time
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 129
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Shipping Is Completed
- Event Date/Time
See also
For more information, see the main release note for the business function Supply Network
Collaboration 1 (SCM_SNC_GEN_1).
2.6.5 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Smart Forms (Enhanced)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, a Smart
Form is available for each PDF-based print form.
2.6.6 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network Collaboration 1
(New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the business
function Supply Network Collaboration 1 is available. Whith this business function, you can do the
following, for example:
- Group purchase orders and work orders to improve visibility and collaboration across the supply
network
- Enable collaboration on quality issues between suppliers and customers using quality notifications
- Improve collaborative planning between SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) and
SAP SNC
- Improve supplier connectivity and ease of operation
- Improve ease of use with bi-directional integration with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 130
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Improve visibility and decision support with quick view enhancements
- Improve engineering collaboration with the sharing of documents using Collaboration Folders
- Group ASNs into a single shipment in SAP SNC
- Use miscellaneous ASN enhancements
- Send additional confirmation data to the customer (such as MPN or price)
For more information, see the following release notes:
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Navigation from RR Overview to Data Import Controller (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Replenishment Order (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Promotion Collaboration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Product Prefilter for TLB Runs in PSM (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Groups (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Exceptions (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Work List (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Confirmation (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Customer Batch Number (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order - Miscellaneous (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Shipment Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Advanced Shipping Notifications (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: ASN Alert Types for Release Processing (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Generation of ASN Alerts (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Goods Receipt Messages (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quality Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Integration of Planned Receipts with the Customer (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Manual Change of Inventory Data for SNI (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: User Administration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: SAP SNC Monitoring with CCMS (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Branding (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quick View (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Collaboration Folders Integration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Due List for Pur.Docs. and R/R List (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Revision Level (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Alert Enhancements (Enhanced)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 131
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: File Transfer (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Smart Forms (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: BI Extractors (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Software Component SNC IC in ESR (New)
See also
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com, under Business Functions for SAP Supply Network Collaboration.
2.6.7 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Integration of Planned Receipts with the Customer
(New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, you, as a
customer, can integrate planned receipts with your SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP
APO) system. You integrate planned receipts if you want to use the planned receipts that the supplier has
created in SAP SNC for your Capable-To-Match (CTM) planning run in SAP APO. You can integrate
planned receipts as part of the following business scenarios:
- Dynamic Replenishment
- Supplier Managed Inventory
After you have set up the planned receipt integration, you send demand forecast data or inventory and
demand data to the SAP SNC system by means of an ProductActivityNotification XML
message. With this data, the supplier creates planned receipts and sends them to the SAP APO system,
where you can continue the CTM planning run.
Effects on Existing Data
In a Dynamic Replenishment business scenario the supplier can modify and send the planned receipts
to the customer on the new Overview - Send Planned Receipts to Customer grid arrangement of the
Order Forecast Details Web screen.
In a Supplier Managed Inventory business scenario, the supplier can modify and send the planned
receipts to the customer from the SMI - Send Planned Receipts to Customer grid arrangement on the
SMI Monitor Details Web screen.
Effects on Data Transfer
In SAP SNC, the following reports are available:
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 132
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Using the Generate Alerts for Overdue Sending of Planned Receipts
(/SCA/GEN_ALERTS_OVERDUE_PLNREC) report, you can create alerts that inform a supplier
that planned receipts are overdue.
- Using the Send Planned Receipts report, you can send planned receipts to the customer. You can
access the report in the SAP Easy Access menu under Supply Network Collaboration -> Tools
-> Send XML Messages for Time Series -> Send Planned Receipts.
Note: SAP APO uses the Send Demand Data (/SAPAPO/PROACT_OUT) transaction to send demand
data from SAP APO to SAP SNC. In your SAP APO system, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose
Advanced Planning and Optimization -> APO Administration -> Integration -> Integration with
SAP Supply Network Collaboration -> Send Demand Data.
Effects on Customizing
In Customizing for Supply Network Collaboration, you determine per location product whether the
planned receipts for that location product are integrated with SAP APO. For the Dynamic
Replenishment business scenario, you make the settings under Demand -> Order Forecast Monitor
-> Assign Settings for Order Forecast Monitor. For the Supplier Managed Inventory business
scenario, you make the settings under Replenishment -> Replenishment Planning -> Assign Settings
-> Assign Settings for Replenishment Planning and SNI.
See also
For more information, see the main release note for the business function Supply Network
Collaboration 1 (SCM_SNC_GEN_1) and SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP
Help Portal at http: //help.sap.com, under the following paths:
- For the Dynamic Replenishment business scenario under SAP Supply Network Collaboration
-> Demand -> Order Forecast Monitor -> Integration of Planned Receipts with the
Customer.
- For the Supplier Managed Inventory business scenario under SAP Supply Network
Collaboration -> Replenishment -> Replenishment Planning -> Replenishment Monitors ->
Functions in the Replenishment Monitor -> Integration of Planned Receipts with the
Customer.
2.6.8 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quick View (Enhanced)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the quick
view offers the following new features:
- Building blocks for alerts
Alert building blocks display high-priority, medium-priority, and low-priority alerts. We deliver
alert building blocks for the following applications and order documents:
- Scheduling agreement release
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 133
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Purchase order
- Supplier Managed Inventory (SMI)
- SMI with replenishment orders
- Supply Network Inventory
- Advanced shipping notification
- Invoice
- Quality notification
- Work order
- Order Forecast Monitor
- Delivery Control Monitor
- Kanban
- Notes
- Tabs
To organize and group building blocks on the quick view, you can create tabs. You can name,
position, and hide tabs on the quick view.
- Microblog
The microblog allows customer and supplier users to communicate with each other by posting short
messages on the quick view of the SAP SNC Web user interface. Users can post messages for
information purposes, messages that require an acknowledgement, and messages which require a
yes or no response from the recipient .
- Building blocks for application-specific key figures
The following building blocks have been added to display application-specific key figures:
- Purchasing Documents Due for ASNs by ASN Due Date
- Planned Receipts Due for ASNs by ASN Due Date
- Purchase Order: Items with ASN Exceptions
- Purchase Order: Items with Confirmation Exceptions
- Open Quality Notifications by End Date
- SA Release: Changed Items by Release Date
- Shipment Status by Delivery Date
- Due Shipments by Shipping Date
- Documents Requiring Invoices
- Critical Products
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 134
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Effects on System Administration
To maintain all microblog messages irrespective of business partner or user, the system administrator can
use the Microblog Administration (/SCA/MBA) transaction. To delete microblog messages from the
database, the system administrator can use the Delete Microblog Messages (/SCA/MBDELETE)
transaction. To send e-mails with microblog messages for which the user has selected the Send E-Mail
checkbox when creating a new message, or for which the user has selected the Forward All Messages
To checkbox under Microblog Settings on the quick view of the SAP SNC Web UI, you must regularly
run the Send E-Mails with Microblog Messages (/SCA/DM_MYSTALK_SEND) report.
See also
For more information, see the main release note for the business function Supply Network
Collaboration 1 (SCM_SNC_GEN_1) and SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP
Help Portal at http://help.sap.com, under SAP Supply Network Collaboration ->
Cross-Application Functions -> Quick View.
2.6.9 SCM-ICH-AFS Functions for SAP Apparel and Footwear
2.6.9.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network Collaboration 1
(New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the business
function Supply Network Collaboration 1 is available. Whith this business function, you can do the
following, for example:
- Group purchase orders and work orders to improve visibility and collaboration across the supply
network
- Enable collaboration on quality issues between suppliers and customers using quality notifications
- Improve collaborative planning between SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) and
SAP SNC
- Improve supplier connectivity and ease of operation
- Improve ease of use with bi-directional integration with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management
- Improve visibility and decision support with quick view enhancements
- Improve engineering collaboration with the sharing of documents using Collaboration Folders
- Group ASNs into a single shipment in SAP SNC
- Use miscellaneous ASN enhancements
- Send additional confirmation data to the customer (such as MPN or price)
For more information, see the following release notes:
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 135
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Navigation from RR Overview to Data Import Controller (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Replenishment Order (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Promotion Collaboration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Product Prefilter for TLB Runs in PSM (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Groups (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Exceptions (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Work List (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Confirmation (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Customer Batch Number (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order - Miscellaneous (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Shipment Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Advanced Shipping Notifications (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: ASN Alert Types for Release Processing (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Generation of ASN Alerts (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Goods Receipt Messages (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quality Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Integration of Planned Receipts with the Customer (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Manual Change of Inventory Data for SNI (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: User Administration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: SAP SNC Monitoring with CCMS (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Branding (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quick View (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Collaboration Folders Integration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Due List for Pur.Docs. and R/R List (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Revision Level (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Alert Enhancements (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: File Transfer (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Smart Forms (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: BI Extractors (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Software Component SNC IC in ESR (New)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 136
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
See also
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com, under Business Functions for SAP Supply Network Collaboration.
2.6.10 SCM-ICH-AMO Alert Monitor
2.6.10.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Alerts (Enhanced)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the following
features are new:
- You can send alert-specific URLs or URLs for grouped alerts in an alert notification e-mail. The
recipient of the alert notification e-mail uses the URL to navigate to an alert-relevant Web screen or
to the Alert Monitor to display the alert details. The alert-specific URL navigates to the Alert
Monitor or an alert-relevant Web screen on the SAP SNC Web UI, while URLs for grouped alerts
navigate only to the Alert Monitor.
- You can set up the system so that it automatically deletes validation alerts for document-based
exceptions.
- You can determine an alert priority for an alert type that is different from the standard.
Effects on Customizing
You make Customizing settings in the following activities:
- You determine the target screen of the alert-specific URL in the alert-notification e-mail in the
Customizing activity Define Target Screen of URL in Alert Notification E-Mail.
- You make settings for the automatic deletion of validation alerts in the Customizing activity Assign
Validation Profiles.
- You can determine an alert priority for an alert type in the Customizing activity Determine Alert
Priority.
See also
For more information, see the main release note for the business function Supply Network
Collaboration 1 (SCM_SNC_GEN_1) and SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP
Help Portal at http://help.sap.com, under SAP Supply Network Collaboration -> Exceptions.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 137
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
2.6.10.2 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Advanced Shipping Notifications
(Enhanced)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, processing of
advanced shipping notifications (ASNs) has been enhanced with the following new features:
- Supplier and customer batch numbers
On the ASN Details screen, ASN History screen, and ASN History Comparison screen, the new
Supplier Batch Number field has been added. The Batch Number field has been renamed to
Customer Batch Number.
- New Last Published field
On the ASN Details screen, on the Admin Details tab page, the new Last Published field has been
added.
- Shipment Assignment
On the following screens, the new Shipment Assigned field has been added, which shows whether
an ASN is assigned to a shipment:
- ASN Overview screen
- Shipping Details tab page of the ASN Details screen
You can navigate to the shipment by clicking the shipment number.
- New ASN alerts for shipment collaboration
To support the integration with the new Shipment Collaboration component, the following new
ASN alerts have been introduced:
- Overdue ASN Is Not Yet in Shipment
- ASN Delivery Date Was Overwritten by Shipment
- Calculation of total weights and volumes
The new pushbutton Calculate Totals has been added to the ASN Details screen. If you choose
this pushbutton, the system calculates the total gross weight, the total net weight, and the total
volume of an ASN and their respective units of measurement. Note that the system only calculates
the total weights and volumes if the user has not entered manual values.
- ASN-based due quantities
When you publish an ASN, the system automatically updates the ASN-based due quantity in the
schedule line of the referenced scheduling agreement release. The due quantities are now displayed
on the Due List for Purchasing Documents screen.
- Copy of ASN item
On the Create ASN screen and the ASN Details (Supplier) screen, in change mode, you can use
the new Copy Item pushbutton to create a new item based on a selected item.
- Integration with the new Quality Collaboration component
From the ASN Overview and the ASN Details screens, you can navigate to the quality
notifications that are related to an ASN.
- Number of goods receipt document in Received Delivery Notification inbound operation
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 138
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
The Received Delivery Notification inbound enterprise service operation was enhanced in such a
way that it can now also receive the number of the referenced goods receipt document at item level.
Effects on Existing Data
Effects on Screens
The ASN Overview screen has been redesigned with the personal objects worklist (POWL) technology.
Effects on ASN-Based Due Quantities
After you have activated the business function Supply Network Collaboration 1 (SCM_SNC_GEN_1),
you must run the report Due Quantity Computing and Setting Change Status Flag in SA Releases
(/SCA/REL_DUE_CHG_SET). The report calculates the ASN-based due quantity for existing
scheduling agreement releases. For more information, see the report documentation.
See also
For more information, see the following documentation:
- Main release note for the Business Function Supply Network Collaboration 1 (New)
- SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com under SAP Supply Network Collaboration -> Delivery
Collaboration -> ASN Processing
- Release note ASN Alert Types for Release Processing (Enhanced)
- Release note Generation of ASN Alerts (Enhanced)
- Release note Shipment Collaboration (New)
- Release note Quality Collaboration (New)
2.6.10.3 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Generation of ASN Alerts (Enhanced)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the
Generate Alerts for Overdue ASNs (/SCA/ASN_PASTDUE_ALERTWRITE) report has been
enhanced. The report generates alerts for overdue ASNs (alert type 31). Instead of generating alerts based
on the delivery date, you can now also generate alerts based on the shipping date as follows: For the
report, an ASN is regarded as overdue if the ASN fulfills the following conditions:
- The shipping date lies, at latest, on a date defined by the user (specified date plus offset in days).
- The supplier has not yet delivered all items in full. However, ASNs or ASN items with the Closed
status are regarded as delivered in full.
The report can now also create alerts for overdue ASNs that are not yet assigned to a shipment.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 139
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Effects on System Administration
You can select if you want to generate alerts for overdue ASNs based on the shipping date or the delivery
date. The default is the delivery date.
See also
For more information, see the following:
- Main release note for the Business Function Supply Network Collaboration 1 (New)
- SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com under SAP Supply Network Collaboration -> ASN Processing ->
ASN Alerts
2.6.10.4 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: ASN Alert Types for Release Processing
(Enhanced)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, new ASN
alerts types are available for release processing (alert types 7437 to 7444). The alerts inform about
deviations between the ASN item data (quantity and delivery date/time) and the corresponding data in the
request schedule lines or in the confirmation schedule lines of the current scheduling agreement release.
SAP SNC creates or updates these alerts automatically upon publication of an ASN or upon receipt of the
successor release.
See also
SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com,
under Delivery Collaboration -> ASN Processing -> ASN Alerts -> Generation of Alerts for
Non-Matching ASNs in Release Processing
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 140
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
2.6.10.5 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network Collaboration 1
(New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the business
function Supply Network Collaboration 1 is available. Whith this business function, you can do the
following, for example:
- Group purchase orders and work orders to improve visibility and collaboration across the supply
network
- Enable collaboration on quality issues between suppliers and customers using quality notifications
- Improve collaborative planning between SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) and
SAP SNC
- Improve supplier connectivity and ease of operation
- Improve ease of use with bi-directional integration with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management
- Improve visibility and decision support with quick view enhancements
- Improve engineering collaboration with the sharing of documents using Collaboration Folders
- Group ASNs into a single shipment in SAP SNC
- Use miscellaneous ASN enhancements
- Send additional confirmation data to the customer (such as MPN or price)
For more information, see the following release notes:
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Navigation from RR Overview to Data Import Controller (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Replenishment Order (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Promotion Collaboration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Product Prefilter for TLB Runs in PSM (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Groups (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Exceptions (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Work List (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Confirmation (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Customer Batch Number (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order - Miscellaneous (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Shipment Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Advanced Shipping Notifications (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: ASN Alert Types for Release Processing (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Generation of ASN Alerts (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Goods Receipt Messages (Changed)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 141
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quality Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Integration of Planned Receipts with the Customer (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Manual Change of Inventory Data for SNI (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: User Administration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: SAP SNC Monitoring with CCMS (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Branding (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quick View (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Collaboration Folders Integration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Due List for Pur.Docs. and R/R List (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Revision Level (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Alert Enhancements (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: File Transfer (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Smart Forms (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: BI Extractors (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Software Component SNC IC in ESR (New)
See also
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com, under Business Functions for SAP Supply Network Collaboration.
2.6.11 SCM-ICH-ASN Advanced Shipping Notification and Shipment
2.6.11.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Advanced Shipping Notifications
(Enhanced)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, processing of
advanced shipping notifications (ASNs) has been enhanced with the following new features:
- Supplier and customer batch numbers
On the ASN Details screen, ASN History screen, and ASN History Comparison screen, the new
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 142
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Supplier Batch Number field has been added. The Batch Number field has been renamed to
Customer Batch Number.
- New Last Published field
On the ASN Details screen, on the Admin Details tab page, the new Last Published field has been
added.
- Shipment Assignment
On the following screens, the new Shipment Assigned field has been added, which shows whether
an ASN is assigned to a shipment:
- ASN Overview screen
- Shipping Details tab page of the ASN Details screen
You can navigate to the shipment by clicking the shipment number.
- New ASN alerts for shipment collaboration
To support the integration with the new Shipment Collaboration component, the following new
ASN alerts have been introduced:
- Overdue ASN Is Not Yet in Shipment
- ASN Delivery Date Was Overwritten by Shipment
- Calculation of total weights and volumes
The new pushbutton Calculate Totals has been added to the ASN Details screen. If you choose
this pushbutton, the system calculates the total gross weight, the total net weight, and the total
volume of an ASN and their respective units of measurement. Note that the system only calculates
the total weights and volumes if the user has not entered manual values.
- ASN-based due quantities
When you publish an ASN, the system automatically updates the ASN-based due quantity in the
schedule line of the referenced scheduling agreement release. The due quantities are now displayed
on the Due List for Purchasing Documents screen.
- Copy of ASN item
On the Create ASN screen and the ASN Details (Supplier) screen, in change mode, you can use
the new Copy Item pushbutton to create a new item based on a selected item.
- Integration with the new Quality Collaboration component
From the ASN Overview and the ASN Details screens, you can navigate to the quality
notifications that are related to an ASN.
- Number of goods receipt document in Received Delivery Notification inbound operation
The Received Delivery Notification inbound enterprise service operation was enhanced in such a
way that it can now also receive the number of the referenced goods receipt document at item level.
Effects on Existing Data
Effects on Screens
The ASN Overview screen has been redesigned with the personal objects worklist (POWL) technology.
Effects on ASN-Based Due Quantities
After you have activated the business function Supply Network Collaboration 1 (SCM_SNC_GEN_1),
you must run the report Due Quantity Computing and Setting Change Status Flag in SA Releases
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 143
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
(/SCA/REL_DUE_CHG_SET). The report calculates the ASN-based due quantity for existing
scheduling agreement releases. For more information, see the report documentation.
See also
For more information, see the following documentation:
- Main release note for the Business Function Supply Network Collaboration 1 (New)
- SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com under SAP Supply Network Collaboration -> Delivery
Collaboration -> ASN Processing
- Release note ASN Alert Types for Release Processing (Enhanced)
- Release note Generation of ASN Alerts (Enhanced)
- Release note Shipment Collaboration (New)
- Release note Quality Collaboration (New)
2.6.11.2 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Generation of ASN Alerts (Enhanced)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the
Generate Alerts for Overdue ASNs (/SCA/ASN_PASTDUE_ALERTWRITE) report has been
enhanced. The report generates alerts for overdue ASNs (alert type 31). Instead of generating alerts based
on the delivery date, you can now also generate alerts based on the shipping date as follows: For the
report, an ASN is regarded as overdue if the ASN fulfills the following conditions:
- The shipping date lies, at latest, on a date defined by the user (specified date plus offset in days).
- The supplier has not yet delivered all items in full. However, ASNs or ASN items with the Closed
status are regarded as delivered in full.
The report can now also create alerts for overdue ASNs that are not yet assigned to a shipment.
Effects on System Administration
You can select if you want to generate alerts for overdue ASNs based on the shipping date or the delivery
date. The default is the delivery date.
See also
For more information, see the following:
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 144
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Main release note for the Business Function Supply Network Collaboration 1 (New)
- SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com under SAP Supply Network Collaboration -> ASN Processing ->
ASN Alerts
2.6.11.3 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: ASN Alert Types for Release Processing
(Enhanced)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, new ASN
alerts types are available for release processing (alert types 7437 to 7444). The alerts inform about
deviations between the ASN item data (quantity and delivery date/time) and the corresponding data in the
request schedule lines or in the confirmation schedule lines of the current scheduling agreement release.
SAP SNC creates or updates these alerts automatically upon publication of an ASN or upon receipt of the
successor release.
See also
SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com,
under Delivery Collaboration -> ASN Processing -> ASN Alerts -> Generation of Alerts for
Non-Matching ASNs in Release Processing
2.6.11.4 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Due List for Pur.Docs. and R/R List (Changed)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, you can
navigate from the receipts and requirements list to the relevant detail screen of a receipt or requirement
element. This feature is available for the following order documents:
- ASN
- Purchase order confirmation
- Purchase order
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 145
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Forecast delivery schedule
- JIT delivery schedule
- Scheduling agreement confirmation
- Replenishment order
You can navigate from the due list for purchasing documents, (Order Doc. Number column), using a
link to the respective order document type detail screen, which, depending on the document type is either
the purchase order details screen, the replenishment order details screen, or the release details screen.
2.6.11.5 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Goods Receipt Messages (Changed)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the goods
receipt document was added to the XML message type ReceivedDeliveryNotification (RDN)
and to the message interface type ReceivedDeliveryNotification_In at item level (new
section GoodsReceiptReference). A goods receipt document is a document that an ERP system
creates when posting a goods receipt (called "material document" in an ERP system of SAP).
The GoodsReceiptReference section is relevant for posting goods receipts with respect to an ASN
item. In addition to the ASN number and the ASN item number, the enhanced RDN message can now
transmit the goods receipt document to SAP SNC, which supports the correct processing of partial goods
receipts in SAP SNC as follows: Upon receipt of an RDN, SAP SNC automatically checks whether it has
already received the same goods receipt document for a particular ASN item previously. If it has, SAP
SNC ignores the goods receipt quantity transmitted for this goods receipt document in the RDN message
under consideration.
2.6.11.6 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network Collaboration 1
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 146
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
(New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the business
function Supply Network Collaboration 1 is available. Whith this business function, you can do the
following, for example:
- Group purchase orders and work orders to improve visibility and collaboration across the supply
network
- Enable collaboration on quality issues between suppliers and customers using quality notifications
- Improve collaborative planning between SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) and
SAP SNC
- Improve supplier connectivity and ease of operation
- Improve ease of use with bi-directional integration with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management
- Improve visibility and decision support with quick view enhancements
- Improve engineering collaboration with the sharing of documents using Collaboration Folders
- Group ASNs into a single shipment in SAP SNC
- Use miscellaneous ASN enhancements
- Send additional confirmation data to the customer (such as MPN or price)
For more information, see the following release notes:
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Navigation from RR Overview to Data Import Controller (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Replenishment Order (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Promotion Collaboration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Product Prefilter for TLB Runs in PSM (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Groups (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Exceptions (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Work List (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Confirmation (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Customer Batch Number (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order - Miscellaneous (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Shipment Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Advanced Shipping Notifications (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: ASN Alert Types for Release Processing (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Generation of ASN Alerts (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Goods Receipt Messages (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quality Collaboration (New)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 147
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Integration of Planned Receipts with the Customer (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Manual Change of Inventory Data for SNI (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: User Administration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: SAP SNC Monitoring with CCMS (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Branding (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quick View (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Collaboration Folders Integration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Due List for Pur.Docs. and R/R List (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Revision Level (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Alert Enhancements (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: File Transfer (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Smart Forms (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: BI Extractors (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Software Component SNC IC in ESR (New)
See also
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com, under Business Functions for SAP Supply Network Collaboration.
2.6.11.7 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Shipment Collaboration (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the new
Shipment Collaboration component is available. The Shipment Collaboration component allows
suppliers to group individual advanced shipping notifications (ASNs) in a shipment. A shipment is a
grouping of goods that are transported together from one location to another. With shipments, suppliers
can organize their deliveries according to the transportation requirements mandated by the customer.
Once the goods are ready to be delivered, all goods belonging to a shipment are loaded to trucks or other
means of transport.
The Shipment Collaboration component comprises customer-specific, goods-recipient-specific, and
supplier-specific screens for various tasks. The supplier can create and process shipments. The customer
and the goods recipient can display the details of existing shipments. In addition, the customer, the goods
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 148
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
recipient, and the supplier can directly navigate from the Shipment Details screen to the Web site of the
shipment tracking system of a carrier (if a URL for such a system is available).
Effects on Existing Data
Effects on Menus
The Web menu for customers, goods recipients, and suppliers in SAP SNC has been enhanced by the
following entry: Delivery -> Shipment. The area menu has been enhanced by the following new entry:
Supply Network Collaboration -> Delivery -> Shipment.
Effects on Existing Screens
On the ASN Overview and ASN Details screens, the new Shipment Assignment field has been added,
which shows whether an ASN is assigned to a shipment. After an upgrade, existing ASNs that have
already been in the system behave as follows:
- The Shipment Assignment field of existing ASNs on the UI is displayed as empty.
- However, the system treats these ASNs as if they have the shipment assignment status Not
Assigned, so users can assign them to shipments.
Effects on Order Document Management
After the activation of the business function Supply Network Collaboration 1 (SCM_SNC_GEN_1),
you must perform some manual steps to activate order document management (ODM) for shipments. For
more information, see SAP Note 1338993.
Effects on Data Transfer
As a customer, you can transfer shipment data from SAP SNC to SAP ERP systems as follows:
- Transfer data from published shipments to SAP ERP and automatically create inbound shipments in
SAP ERP
- Transfer data from canceled shipments to SAP ERP and automatically cancel associated inbound
shipments in SAP ERP
We provide the following service interfaces for the message exchange:
- FreightOrderExecutionRequest_Out service interface for creating shipments
- FreightOrderExecutionCancelRequest_Out service interface for canceling shipments
As of SAP ERP 6.0, you can use operation mappings to convert XML messages into the following IDocs:
- SHPMNT.SHPMNT05 for creating shipments
- SHPCPR.TPSSHT01 for canceling shipments
As of SAP Enhancement Package 3 for SAP ERP 6.0, you can receive shipment information from SAP
SNC using the the following service interfaces:
- FreightOrderExecutionRequest_In service interface if creating shipments
- FreightOrderExecutionCancelRequest_In service interface if canceling shipments
In previous releases, you could use XML messages of type ReceivedDeliveryNotification to
receive information about goods receipt posting of ASNs and update the ASN status in SAP SNC
accordingly. As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP SNC 7.0, SAP SNC also updates the shipment
status.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 149
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Effects on System Administration
New Reports
As a customer, you can use the following new reports to handle unneeded shipments or shipments that
have not been published correctly:
- Close Shipments (/SCA/SHIPMENT_CLOSE)
- Delete Shipments (/SCA/SHIPMENT_DELETE)
- Publish Shipment (/SCA/SHIPMENT_PUBLISH)
You use this report to send a shipment XML message again when the sending of a shipment XML
message has failed. The report generates an XML message of type
FreightOrderExecutionRequest or FreightOrderExecutionCancelRequest and
sends it to your back-end system.
Updated Report for Generating of ASN Alerts
The Generate Alerts for Overdue ASNs (/SCA/ASN_PASTDUE_ALERTWRITE) report has been
enhanced to generate alerts for overdue ASNs that have not yet been assigned to a shipment.
Shipment Posting in SAP ERP
If you transfer shipment data from SAP SNC to SAP ERP using XML messages and IDocs, SAP ERP
can only create inbound shipments if the corresponding inbound deliveries have been created previously.
If this is not the case, the IDoc posting in SAP ERP fails. To repeat the posting of shipment IDocs whose
posting has failed, you must schedule the Manual Processing of IDocs: Post IDocs Not Yet Posted
(RBDMANI2) report in SAP ERP.
Roles
The following roles have been enhanced to include authorizations to call up the new Shipment
Collaboration supplier or customer screens:
- ASN Maintenance (Supplier) (SAP_SCM_ICH_ASN_SUP)
- Supplier Collaboration: Superuser and Administrator (Supplier) (SAP_SCM_ICH_SU_SUP)
- Supplier Collaboration: Administrator (Customer) (SAP_SCM_ICH_ADM_CUS)
- Supplier Collaboration: Superuser (Customer) (SAP_SCM_ICH_SU_CUS)
Effects on Customizing
You make the Customizing settings for Shipment Collaboration in Customizing for Supply Network
Collaboration, in the following Customizing activities:
- Delivery -> Shipment -> Define Settings for ASN Assignments to Shipments
- Basic Settings -> Printing -> Determine Print Forms for Shipment Documents
- Basic Settings -> Visibility -> Create Selection Modes
In addition, the following Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) are available:
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 150
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- To change outbound data processing of the FreightOrderExecutionRequest XML
message, you can use the BAdI BAdI for FreightOrderExecutionRequest_Out
(/SCA/BIF_O_FOEXECRQ) (see Supply Network Collaboration -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs)
for SAP SNC -> Basic Settings -> Processing Inbound and Outbound Messages -> BAdIs
for Message Interfaces (Outbound XML Messages) -> BAdI for
FreightOrderExecutionRequest_Out).
- To run your own algorithms during shipment processing, you can implement the BAdI BAdI:
Processing of Shipments (/SCA/SHIPMENT_BOL) (see Supply Network Collaboration ->
Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for SAP SNC -> Delivery -> Shipment -> BAdI: Processing of
Shipments).
- To convert shipment numbers, you can implement the BAdI BAdI: Conversion of Shipment
Numbers (/SCMB/BOL_SHPCV) (see Supply Network Collaboration -> Business Add-Ins
(BAdIs) for SAP SNC -> Delivery -> Shipment -> BAdI: Conversion of Shipment Numbers).
See also
For more information, see the release note SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Advanced Shipping
Notifications (Enhanced) and SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com under SAP Supply Network Collaboration -> Delivery Collaboration ->
Shipment Collaboration.
2.6.11.8 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens (Enhanced)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, a number of
additional selection parameters are available on various screens..
Effects on Existing Data
On the purchase order worklist, additional selection parameters are available for the worklist object types:
- In the Confirm&Publish Purchase Order Items (Supplier) worklist object type the following
additional selection parameters are available:
- Customer batch
- Item changed on (relative to today)
- Item changed on
- Seller
- Original sales order number
- WBS element
- Approval status
- Exception
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 151
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Group indicator
- In the Canceled / Blocked Purchase Order Items (Supplier) worklist object type the following
additional selection parameters are available:
- Product group
- Product group type
- Customer batch
- Item changed on (relative to today)
- Item changed on
- Seller
- Original sales order number
- WBS element
- Approval status
- Group indicator
- In the Purchase Order Items (Supplier) worklist object type the following additional selection
parameters are available:
- Customer batch
- Item changed on (relative to today)
- Item changed on
- Seller
- Original sales order number
- WBS eement
- Approval satus
- Exception
- Group indicator
- In the Rejected Purchase Order Items worklist object type the following additional selection
parameters are available:
- Customer batch
- Item changed on (relative to today)
- Item changed on
- Group indicator
- Purchasing group
- In the Purchase Order Items (Customer) worklist object type the following additional selection
parameters are available:
- Customer batch
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 152
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Item changed on (relative to today)
- Item changed on
- Seller
- Original sales order number
- WBS element
- Approval status
- Exception
- Group indicator
- Purchasing group
In the supplier view of the due list for purchasing documents, the following additional selection
parameters are available:
- Approval status
- Confirmation status
- Order document type
In the customer view of the due list for purchasing documents, the following additional selection
parameters are available:
- Approval status
- Confirmation status
- Order document type
- Purchasing group
On the Documents Requiring Invoices screen, the shipping date is available as a selection parameter.
The purchasing group is now available as a selection parameter on the following screens:
- Customer worklists for purchase orders as described above
- Customer overview screens for purchase orders, advanced shipping notifications, releases, and
invoices
- Customer due list for purchasing documents (as described above) and the customer receipts and
requirements list
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 153
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
2.6.12 SCM-ICH-DIO Inbound/Outbound Data Processing
2.6.12.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Navigation from RR Overview to DIC (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, you can call
up the Product Activity Message screen for a location product that you have selected on the
Responsive Replenishment Overview screen.
2.6.12.2 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Software Component SNC IC in ESR (New)
Use
In previous releases, the integration scenarios and the mappings for SAP SNC were in software
component SNC in the enterprise services repository (ESR). As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP
Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the integration scenarios and the mappings are assigned
to the new software component SNC IC.
2.6.12.3 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Goods Receipt Messages (Changed)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the goods
receipt document was added to the XML message type ReceivedDeliveryNotification (RDN)
and to the message interface type ReceivedDeliveryNotification_In at item level (new
section GoodsReceiptReference). A goods receipt document is a document that an ERP system
creates when posting a goods receipt (called "material document" in an ERP system of SAP).
The GoodsReceiptReference section is relevant for posting goods receipts with respect to an ASN
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 154
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
item. In addition to the ASN number and the ASN item number, the enhanced RDN message can now
transmit the goods receipt document to SAP SNC, which supports the correct processing of partial goods
receipts in SAP SNC as follows: Upon receipt of an RDN, SAP SNC automatically checks whether it has
already received the same goods receipt document for a particular ASN item previously. If it has, SAP
SNC ignores the goods receipt quantity transmitted for this goods receipt document in the RDN message
under consideration.
2.6.12.4 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network Collaboration 1
(New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the business
function Supply Network Collaboration 1 is available. Whith this business function, you can do the
following, for example:
- Group purchase orders and work orders to improve visibility and collaboration across the supply
network
- Enable collaboration on quality issues between suppliers and customers using quality notifications
- Improve collaborative planning between SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) and
SAP SNC
- Improve supplier connectivity and ease of operation
- Improve ease of use with bi-directional integration with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management
- Improve visibility and decision support with quick view enhancements
- Improve engineering collaboration with the sharing of documents using Collaboration Folders
- Group ASNs into a single shipment in SAP SNC
- Use miscellaneous ASN enhancements
- Send additional confirmation data to the customer (such as MPN or price)
For more information, see the following release notes:
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Navigation from RR Overview to Data Import Controller (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Replenishment Order (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Promotion Collaboration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Product Prefilter for TLB Runs in PSM (New)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 155
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Groups (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Exceptions (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Work List (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Confirmation (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Customer Batch Number (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order - Miscellaneous (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Shipment Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Advanced Shipping Notifications (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: ASN Alert Types for Release Processing (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Generation of ASN Alerts (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Goods Receipt Messages (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quality Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Integration of Planned Receipts with the Customer (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Manual Change of Inventory Data for SNI (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: User Administration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: SAP SNC Monitoring with CCMS (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Branding (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quick View (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Collaboration Folders Integration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Due List for Pur.Docs. and R/R List (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Revision Level (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Alert Enhancements (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: File Transfer (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Smart Forms (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: BI Extractors (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Software Component SNC IC in ESR (New)
See also
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 156
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
http://help.sap.com, under Business Functions for SAP Supply Network Collaboration.
2.6.13 SCM-ICH-EM Event Management for SAP SNC
2.6.13.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network Collaboration 1
(New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the business
function Supply Network Collaboration 1 is available. Whith this business function, you can do the
following, for example:
- Group purchase orders and work orders to improve visibility and collaboration across the supply
network
- Enable collaboration on quality issues between suppliers and customers using quality notifications
- Improve collaborative planning between SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) and
SAP SNC
- Improve supplier connectivity and ease of operation
- Improve ease of use with bi-directional integration with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management
- Improve visibility and decision support with quick view enhancements
- Improve engineering collaboration with the sharing of documents using Collaboration Folders
- Group ASNs into a single shipment in SAP SNC
- Use miscellaneous ASN enhancements
- Send additional confirmation data to the customer (such as MPN or price)
For more information, see the following release notes:
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Navigation from RR Overview to Data Import Controller (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Replenishment Order (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Promotion Collaboration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Product Prefilter for TLB Runs in PSM (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Groups (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Exceptions (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Work List (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Confirmation (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Customer Batch Number (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order - Miscellaneous (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Shipment Collaboration (New)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 157
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Advanced Shipping Notifications (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: ASN Alert Types for Release Processing (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Generation of ASN Alerts (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Goods Receipt Messages (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quality Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Integration of Planned Receipts with the Customer (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Manual Change of Inventory Data for SNI (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: User Administration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: SAP SNC Monitoring with CCMS (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Branding (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quick View (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Collaboration Folders Integration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Due List for Pur.Docs. and R/R List (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Revision Level (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Alert Enhancements (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: File Transfer (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Smart Forms (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: BI Extractors (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Software Component SNC IC in ESR (New)
See also
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com, under Business Functions for SAP Supply Network Collaboration.
2.6.14 SCM-ICH-ERP ERP-SNC Integration
2.6.14.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Software Component SNC IC in ESR (New)
Use
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 158
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
In previous releases, the integration scenarios and the mappings for SAP SNC were in software
component SNC in the enterprise services repository (ESR). As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP
Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the integration scenarios and the mappings are assigned
to the new software component SNC IC.
2.6.14.2 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network Collaboration 1
(New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the business
function Supply Network Collaboration 1 is available. Whith this business function, you can do the
following, for example:
- Group purchase orders and work orders to improve visibility and collaboration across the supply
network
- Enable collaboration on quality issues between suppliers and customers using quality notifications
- Improve collaborative planning between SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) and
SAP SNC
- Improve supplier connectivity and ease of operation
- Improve ease of use with bi-directional integration with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management
- Improve visibility and decision support with quick view enhancements
- Improve engineering collaboration with the sharing of documents using Collaboration Folders
- Group ASNs into a single shipment in SAP SNC
- Use miscellaneous ASN enhancements
- Send additional confirmation data to the customer (such as MPN or price)
For more information, see the following release notes:
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Navigation from RR Overview to Data Import Controller (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Replenishment Order (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Promotion Collaboration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Product Prefilter for TLB Runs in PSM (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Groups (New)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 159
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Exceptions (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Work List (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Confirmation (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Customer Batch Number (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order - Miscellaneous (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Shipment Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Advanced Shipping Notifications (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: ASN Alert Types for Release Processing (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Generation of ASN Alerts (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Goods Receipt Messages (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quality Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Integration of Planned Receipts with the Customer (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Manual Change of Inventory Data for SNI (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: User Administration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: SAP SNC Monitoring with CCMS (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Branding (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quick View (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Collaboration Folders Integration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Due List for Pur.Docs. and R/R List (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Revision Level (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Alert Enhancements (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: File Transfer (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Smart Forms (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: BI Extractors (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Software Component SNC IC in ESR (New)
See also
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com, under Business Functions for SAP Supply Network Collaboration.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 160
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
2.6.14.3 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Confirmation (Enhanced)
Use
Previously, you could transfer confirmation data to an SAP ERP back-end system using the
ReplenishmentOrderConfirmation XML message mapped to an Idoc. However, this integration
did not transfer the manufacturer part number data in the confirmation schedule lines of purchase order.
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, a supplier
can send purchase order confirmations to the customer back-end system using
PurchaseOrderERPConfirmationRequest XML messages. This enables you to transfer the
above data to a customer SAP back-end system of enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Effects on Customizing
To use the PurchaseOrderERPConfirmationRequest XML message when sending purchase
order confirmations, the PO_PURORDERPCNFREQ_SEND validation check must be active in the
validation profile that you use for the PO publication process (ORDERCONF_PUBLISH). In the standard
validation profile POC3 this validation check is inactive. You can activate the validation check in
Customizing for Supply Network Collaboration, under Basic Settings -> Validation -> Own
Settings -> Maintain Settings in Validation Profiles.
See also
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com, under Purchase Order Collaboration -> Integration with an SAP Back-End
System -> Using XML Messages with an SAP ERP Back-End System and Purchase Order
Collaboration -> Special Topics in Purchase Order Collaboration -> Manufacturer Part Number
in Purchase Order Collaboration -> Use of MPNs with an SAP ERP Back-End System.
2.6.15 SCM-ICH-FCS Forecast
2.6.15.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Due List for Pur.Docs. and R/R List (Changed)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, you can
navigate from the receipts and requirements list to the relevant detail screen of a receipt or requirement
element. This feature is available for the following order documents:
- ASN
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 161
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Purchase order confirmation
- Purchase order
- Forecast delivery schedule
- JIT delivery schedule
- Scheduling agreement confirmation
- Replenishment order
You can navigate from the due list for purchasing documents, (Order Doc. Number column), using a
link to the respective order document type detail screen, which, depending on the document type is either
the purchase order details screen, the replenishment order details screen, or the release details screen.
2.6.15.2 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network Collaboration 1
(New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the business
function Supply Network Collaboration 1 is available. Whith this business function, you can do the
following, for example:
- Group purchase orders and work orders to improve visibility and collaboration across the supply
network
- Enable collaboration on quality issues between suppliers and customers using quality notifications
- Improve collaborative planning between SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) and
SAP SNC
- Improve supplier connectivity and ease of operation
- Improve ease of use with bi-directional integration with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management
- Improve visibility and decision support with quick view enhancements
- Improve engineering collaboration with the sharing of documents using Collaboration Folders
- Group ASNs into a single shipment in SAP SNC
- Use miscellaneous ASN enhancements
- Send additional confirmation data to the customer (such as MPN or price)
For more information, see the following release notes:
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 162
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Navigation from RR Overview to Data Import Controller (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Replenishment Order (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Promotion Collaboration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Product Prefilter for TLB Runs in PSM (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Groups (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Exceptions (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Work List (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Confirmation (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Customer Batch Number (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order - Miscellaneous (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Shipment Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Advanced Shipping Notifications (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: ASN Alert Types for Release Processing (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Generation of ASN Alerts (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Goods Receipt Messages (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quality Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Integration of Planned Receipts with the Customer (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Manual Change of Inventory Data for SNI (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: User Administration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: SAP SNC Monitoring with CCMS (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Branding (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quick View (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Collaboration Folders Integration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Due List for Pur.Docs. and R/R List (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Revision Level (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Alert Enhancements (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: File Transfer (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Smart Forms (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: BI Extractors (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Software Component SNC IC in ESR (New)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 163
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
See also
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com, under Business Functions for SAP Supply Network Collaboration.
2.6.16 SCM-ICH-FTR File Transfer
2.6.16.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: File Transfer (Enhanced)
Use
As of enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, you can use the
following new files for file transfer:
- Invoice
- Download data for documents requiring invoices
- Upload data for documents requiring invoices
- Work order actual data
- Download work order actual data that needs to be reported
- Upload work order actual data
- Supply Network Inventory
- Download SNI data for multiple location products, including ship-from location information
- Upload SNI data for multiple location products, including ship-from location information
You can use the following enhanced files:
- Purchase order
- Download purchase orders to confirm subcontracting components of subcontract orders
- Upload purchase order to confirm subcontracting components of subcontract orders
- Supplier Managed Inventory
- Stock on hand information is now available in the CSV file.
- Due list for purchasing documents
- Revision level information is now available in the CSV file.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 164
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Effects on Customizing
The Customizing activity Maintain Job Scheduling has been enhanced to enable you to define your own
job schedule.
For file transfer the following new Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) are available in Customizing for Supply
Network Collaboration under Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for SAP SNC -> Tools -> File Transfer:
- BAdI: Supply Network Inventory Interface
- BAdI: Work Order Interface
- BAdI: Invoice Interface
The following Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) have been enhanced to allow a customer who has added a new
field or column to his or her SAP SNC Web screens, for example to include customer-specific
information, and to enhance the CSV file with the field or column thereby enabling the download and
upload of this information:
- BAdI: Purchase Order Interface
- BAdI: Due List for Purchasing Documents
- BAdI: Due List for Planned Receipts
See also
For more information, see the main release note for the business function Supply Network
Collaboration 1 (SCM_SNC_GEN_1) and SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP
Help Portal at http://help.sap.com, under SAP Supply Network Collaboration ->
Cross-Application Functions -> File Transfer.
2.6.16.2 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network Collaboration 1
(New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the business
function Supply Network Collaboration 1 is available. Whith this business function, you can do the
following, for example:
- Group purchase orders and work orders to improve visibility and collaboration across the supply
network
- Enable collaboration on quality issues between suppliers and customers using quality notifications
- Improve collaborative planning between SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) and
SAP SNC
- Improve supplier connectivity and ease of operation
- Improve ease of use with bi-directional integration with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management
- Improve visibility and decision support with quick view enhancements
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 165
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Improve engineering collaboration with the sharing of documents using Collaboration Folders
- Group ASNs into a single shipment in SAP SNC
- Use miscellaneous ASN enhancements
- Send additional confirmation data to the customer (such as MPN or price)
For more information, see the following release notes:
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Navigation from RR Overview to Data Import Controller (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Replenishment Order (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Promotion Collaboration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Product Prefilter for TLB Runs in PSM (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Groups (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Exceptions (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Work List (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Confirmation (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Customer Batch Number (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order - Miscellaneous (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Shipment Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Advanced Shipping Notifications (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: ASN Alert Types for Release Processing (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Generation of ASN Alerts (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Goods Receipt Messages (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quality Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Integration of Planned Receipts with the Customer (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Manual Change of Inventory Data for SNI (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: User Administration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: SAP SNC Monitoring with CCMS (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Branding (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quick View (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Collaboration Folders Integration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Due List for Pur.Docs. and R/R List (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Revision Level (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Alert Enhancements (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: File Transfer (Enhanced)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 166
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Smart Forms (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: BI Extractors (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Software Component SNC IC in ESR (New)
See also
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com, under Business Functions for SAP Supply Network Collaboration.
2.6.17 SCM-ICH-IMO Inventory Monitor
2.6.17.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Navigation from RR Overview to DIC (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, you can call
up the Product Activity Message screen for a location product that you have selected on the
Responsive Replenishment Overview screen.
2.6.17.2 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network Collaboration 1
(New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the business
function Supply Network Collaboration 1 is available. Whith this business function, you can do the
following, for example:
- Group purchase orders and work orders to improve visibility and collaboration across the supply
network
- Enable collaboration on quality issues between suppliers and customers using quality notifications
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 167
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Improve collaborative planning between SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) and
SAP SNC
- Improve supplier connectivity and ease of operation
- Improve ease of use with bi-directional integration with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management
- Improve visibility and decision support with quick view enhancements
- Improve engineering collaboration with the sharing of documents using Collaboration Folders
- Group ASNs into a single shipment in SAP SNC
- Use miscellaneous ASN enhancements
- Send additional confirmation data to the customer (such as MPN or price)
For more information, see the following release notes:
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Navigation from RR Overview to Data Import Controller (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Replenishment Order (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Promotion Collaboration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Product Prefilter for TLB Runs in PSM (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Groups (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Exceptions (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Work List (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Confirmation (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Customer Batch Number (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order - Miscellaneous (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Shipment Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Advanced Shipping Notifications (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: ASN Alert Types for Release Processing (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Generation of ASN Alerts (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Goods Receipt Messages (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quality Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Integration of Planned Receipts with the Customer (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Manual Change of Inventory Data for SNI (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: User Administration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: SAP SNC Monitoring with CCMS (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Branding (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quick View (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Collaboration Folders Integration (Enhanced)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 168
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Due List for Pur.Docs. and R/R List (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Revision Level (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Alert Enhancements (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: File Transfer (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Smart Forms (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: BI Extractors (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Software Component SNC IC in ESR (New)
See also
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com, under Business Functions for SAP Supply Network Collaboration.
2.6.18 SCM-ICH-IV Invoice
2.6.18.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network Collaboration 1
(New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the business
function Supply Network Collaboration 1 is available. Whith this business function, you can do the
following, for example:
- Group purchase orders and work orders to improve visibility and collaboration across the supply
network
- Enable collaboration on quality issues between suppliers and customers using quality notifications
- Improve collaborative planning between SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) and
SAP SNC
- Improve supplier connectivity and ease of operation
- Improve ease of use with bi-directional integration with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management
- Improve visibility and decision support with quick view enhancements
- Improve engineering collaboration with the sharing of documents using Collaboration Folders
- Group ASNs into a single shipment in SAP SNC
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 169
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Use miscellaneous ASN enhancements
- Send additional confirmation data to the customer (such as MPN or price)
For more information, see the following release notes:
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Navigation from RR Overview to Data Import Controller (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Replenishment Order (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Promotion Collaboration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Product Prefilter for TLB Runs in PSM (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Groups (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Exceptions (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Work List (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Confirmation (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Customer Batch Number (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order - Miscellaneous (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Shipment Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Advanced Shipping Notifications (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: ASN Alert Types for Release Processing (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Generation of ASN Alerts (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Goods Receipt Messages (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quality Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Integration of Planned Receipts with the Customer (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Manual Change of Inventory Data for SNI (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: User Administration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: SAP SNC Monitoring with CCMS (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Branding (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quick View (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Collaboration Folders Integration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Due List for Pur.Docs. and R/R List (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Revision Level (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Alert Enhancements (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: File Transfer (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Smart Forms (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: BI Extractors (Enhanced)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 170
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Software Component SNC IC in ESR (New)
See also
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com, under Business Functions for SAP Supply Network Collaboration.
2.6.18.2 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens (Enhanced)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, a number of
additional selection parameters are available on various screens..
Effects on Existing Data
On the purchase order worklist, additional selection parameters are available for the worklist object types:
- In the Confirm&Publish Purchase Order Items (Supplier) worklist object type the following
additional selection parameters are available:
- Customer batch
- Item changed on (relative to today)
- Item changed on
- Seller
- Original sales order number
- WBS element
- Approval status
- Exception
- Group indicator
- In the Canceled / Blocked Purchase Order Items (Supplier) worklist object type the following
additional selection parameters are available:
- Product group
- Product group type
- Customer batch
- Item changed on (relative to today)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 171
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Item changed on
- Seller
- Original sales order number
- WBS element
- Approval status
- Group indicator
- In the Purchase Order Items (Supplier) worklist object type the following additional selection
parameters are available:
- Customer batch
- Item changed on (relative to today)
- Item changed on
- Seller
- Original sales order number
- WBS eement
- Approval satus
- Exception
- Group indicator
- In the Rejected Purchase Order Items worklist object type the following additional selection
parameters are available:
- Customer batch
- Item changed on (relative to today)
- Item changed on
- Group indicator
- Purchasing group
- In the Purchase Order Items (Customer) worklist object type the following additional selection
parameters are available:
- Customer batch
- Item changed on (relative to today)
- Item changed on
- Seller
- Original sales order number
- WBS element
- Approval status
- Exception
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 172
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Group indicator
- Purchasing group
In the supplier view of the due list for purchasing documents, the following additional selection
parameters are available:
- Approval status
- Confirmation status
- Order document type
In the customer view of the due list for purchasing documents, the following additional selection
parameters are available:
- Approval status
- Confirmation status
- Order document type
- Purchasing group
On the Documents Requiring Invoices screen, the shipping date is available as a selection parameter.
The purchasing group is now available as a selection parameter on the following screens:
- Customer worklists for purchase orders as described above
- Customer overview screens for purchase orders, advanced shipping notifications, releases, and
invoices
- Customer due list for purchasing documents (as described above) and the customer receipts and
requirements list
2.6.19 SCM-ICH-KNB Kanban
2.6.19.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network Collaboration 1
(New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the business
function Supply Network Collaboration 1 is available. Whith this business function, you can do the
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 173
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
following, for example:
- Group purchase orders and work orders to improve visibility and collaboration across the supply
network
- Enable collaboration on quality issues between suppliers and customers using quality notifications
- Improve collaborative planning between SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) and
SAP SNC
- Improve supplier connectivity and ease of operation
- Improve ease of use with bi-directional integration with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management
- Improve visibility and decision support with quick view enhancements
- Improve engineering collaboration with the sharing of documents using Collaboration Folders
- Group ASNs into a single shipment in SAP SNC
- Use miscellaneous ASN enhancements
- Send additional confirmation data to the customer (such as MPN or price)
For more information, see the following release notes:
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Navigation from RR Overview to Data Import Controller (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Replenishment Order (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Promotion Collaboration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Product Prefilter for TLB Runs in PSM (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Groups (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Exceptions (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Work List (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Confirmation (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Customer Batch Number (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order - Miscellaneous (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Shipment Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Advanced Shipping Notifications (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: ASN Alert Types for Release Processing (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Generation of ASN Alerts (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Goods Receipt Messages (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quality Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Integration of Planned Receipts with the Customer (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Manual Change of Inventory Data for SNI (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: User Administration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: SAP SNC Monitoring with CCMS (Enhanced)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 174
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Branding (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quick View (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Collaboration Folders Integration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Due List for Pur.Docs. and R/R List (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Revision Level (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Alert Enhancements (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: File Transfer (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Smart Forms (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: BI Extractors (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Software Component SNC IC in ESR (New)
See also
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com, under Business Functions for SAP Supply Network Collaboration.
2.6.20 SCM-ICH-MD Master Data
2.6.20.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network Collaboration 1
(New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the business
function Supply Network Collaboration 1 is available. Whith this business function, you can do the
following, for example:
- Group purchase orders and work orders to improve visibility and collaboration across the supply
network
- Enable collaboration on quality issues between suppliers and customers using quality notifications
- Improve collaborative planning between SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) and
SAP SNC
- Improve supplier connectivity and ease of operation
- Improve ease of use with bi-directional integration with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 175
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Improve visibility and decision support with quick view enhancements
- Improve engineering collaboration with the sharing of documents using Collaboration Folders
- Group ASNs into a single shipment in SAP SNC
- Use miscellaneous ASN enhancements
- Send additional confirmation data to the customer (such as MPN or price)
For more information, see the following release notes:
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Navigation from RR Overview to Data Import Controller (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Replenishment Order (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Promotion Collaboration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Product Prefilter for TLB Runs in PSM (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Groups (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Exceptions (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Work List (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Confirmation (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Customer Batch Number (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order - Miscellaneous (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Shipment Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Advanced Shipping Notifications (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: ASN Alert Types for Release Processing (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Generation of ASN Alerts (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Goods Receipt Messages (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quality Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Integration of Planned Receipts with the Customer (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Manual Change of Inventory Data for SNI (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: User Administration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: SAP SNC Monitoring with CCMS (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Branding (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quick View (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Collaboration Folders Integration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Due List for Pur.Docs. and R/R List (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Revision Level (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Alert Enhancements (Enhanced)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 176
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: File Transfer (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Smart Forms (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: BI Extractors (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Software Component SNC IC in ESR (New)
See also
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com, under Business Functions for SAP Supply Network Collaboration.
2.6.20.2 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: User Administration (Enhanced)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, a user can
maintain his or her own general data, such as name, e-mail address, and telephone number, on the User
Administration (Own Data) Web screen of the SAP SNC Web user interface.
You can integrate SAP NetWeaver Identity Management with user administration in SAP SNC. For more
information, see FND_IDM_1: FND, SAP SNC Integration with SAP NW Identity Mgmt (New).
You can use hosted user administration if you are running your SAP SNC system in a hosted scenario.
You can set up user administration so that it is the hosting business partner who runs the user
administration function.
Effects on Existing Data
If you use SAP NetWeaver Identity Management as of Release 7.1, the names of the following
pushbuttons on the User Administration Web screens change:
- The Save pushbutton changes to Request Save.
- The Resend Welcome E-Mail pushbutton changes to Send SAP SNC-Specific E-Mail.
Effects on Data Transfer
You can use the Business Add-In (BAdI) Checking the Naming Convention of the User Name
(/SCA/PUM_USERCHECK) to check that a user name entered on one of the User Administration Web
screens adheres to a naming convention. You call up the BAdI in Customizing for Supply Network
Collaboration under Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for SAP SNC -> Master Data -> User
Administration -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for User Administration -> BAdI: Checking the
Naming Convention of the User Name.
Effects on System Administration
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 177
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
If you are using hosted user administration, you must ensure that the customer cannot access the User
Administration (Power Administrator) Web screen. To ensure that the customer cannot access the Web
screen, you must modify the Supplier Collaboration: Superuser (Customer)
(SAP_SCM_ICH_SU_CUS) role. You can modify roles in the Role Maintenance (PFCG) transaction.
See also
For more information, see the following:
- Release note FND_IDM_1: FND, SAP SNC Integration with SAP NW Identity Mgmt (New)
- SAP Library SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at http:
//help.sap.com, under SAP Supply Network Collaboration -> Master Data -> User
Administration.
2.6.21 SCM-ICH-NDC Net Requirements Calculation
2.6.21.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network Collaboration 1
(New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the business
function Supply Network Collaboration 1 is available. Whith this business function, you can do the
following, for example:
- Group purchase orders and work orders to improve visibility and collaboration across the supply
network
- Enable collaboration on quality issues between suppliers and customers using quality notifications
- Improve collaborative planning between SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) and
SAP SNC
- Improve supplier connectivity and ease of operation
- Improve ease of use with bi-directional integration with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management
- Improve visibility and decision support with quick view enhancements
- Improve engineering collaboration with the sharing of documents using Collaboration Folders
- Group ASNs into a single shipment in SAP SNC
- Use miscellaneous ASN enhancements
- Send additional confirmation data to the customer (such as MPN or price)
For more information, see the following release notes:
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Navigation from RR Overview to Data Import Controller (New)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 178
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Replenishment Order (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Promotion Collaboration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Product Prefilter for TLB Runs in PSM (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Groups (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Exceptions (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Work List (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Confirmation (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Customer Batch Number (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order - Miscellaneous (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Shipment Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Advanced Shipping Notifications (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: ASN Alert Types for Release Processing (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Generation of ASN Alerts (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Goods Receipt Messages (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quality Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Integration of Planned Receipts with the Customer (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Manual Change of Inventory Data for SNI (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: User Administration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: SAP SNC Monitoring with CCMS (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Branding (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quick View (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Collaboration Folders Integration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Due List for Pur.Docs. and R/R List (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Revision Level (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Alert Enhancements (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: File Transfer (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Smart Forms (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: BI Extractors (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Software Component SNC IC in ESR (New)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 179
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
See also
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com, under Business Functions for SAP Supply Network Collaboration.
2.6.22 SCM-ICH-PO Purchase Order and Replenishment Order
2.6.22.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Customer Batch Number (Changed)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, you can use
batch validation if you want the supplier to use only certain customer batches for components and to enter
only numbers of allowed customer batches in the components of a purchase order confirmation. A
validation check is available to check that the entered customer batch number is valid for the supplier
Effects on Customizing
You specify the source of the customer batch number in Customizing for Supply Network
Collaboration under Purchase Order -> Make General Settings for Purchase Orders.
See also
SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com
under SAP Supply Network Collaboration -> Purchase Order Collaboration -> Special Topics in
Purchase Order Collaboration -> Batches and Configuration in Purchase Order Collaboration.
2.6.22.2 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Due List for Pur.Docs. and R/R List (Changed)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, you can
navigate from the receipts and requirements list to the relevant detail screen of a receipt or requirement
element. This feature is available for the following order documents:
- ASN
- Purchase order confirmation
- Purchase order
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 180
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Forecast delivery schedule
- JIT delivery schedule
- Scheduling agreement confirmation
- Replenishment order
You can navigate from the due list for purchasing documents, (Order Doc. Number column), using a
link to the respective order document type detail screen, which, depending on the document type is either
the purchase order details screen, the replenishment order details screen, or the release details screen.
2.6.22.3 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network Collaboration 1
(New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the business
function Supply Network Collaboration 1 is available. Whith this business function, you can do the
following, for example:
- Group purchase orders and work orders to improve visibility and collaboration across the supply
network
- Enable collaboration on quality issues between suppliers and customers using quality notifications
- Improve collaborative planning between SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) and
SAP SNC
- Improve supplier connectivity and ease of operation
- Improve ease of use with bi-directional integration with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management
- Improve visibility and decision support with quick view enhancements
- Improve engineering collaboration with the sharing of documents using Collaboration Folders
- Group ASNs into a single shipment in SAP SNC
- Use miscellaneous ASN enhancements
- Send additional confirmation data to the customer (such as MPN or price)
For more information, see the following release notes:
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Navigation from RR Overview to Data Import Controller (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Replenishment Order (Enhanced)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 181
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Promotion Collaboration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Product Prefilter for TLB Runs in PSM (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Groups (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Exceptions (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Work List (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Confirmation (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Customer Batch Number (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order - Miscellaneous (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Shipment Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Advanced Shipping Notifications (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: ASN Alert Types for Release Processing (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Generation of ASN Alerts (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Goods Receipt Messages (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quality Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Integration of Planned Receipts with the Customer (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Manual Change of Inventory Data for SNI (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: User Administration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: SAP SNC Monitoring with CCMS (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Branding (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quick View (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Collaboration Folders Integration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Due List for Pur.Docs. and R/R List (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Revision Level (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Alert Enhancements (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: File Transfer (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Smart Forms (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: BI Extractors (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Software Component SNC IC in ESR (New)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 182
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
See also
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com, under Business Functions for SAP Supply Network Collaboration.
2.6.22.4 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order - Miscellaneous (Enhanced)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the following
enhancements to purchase order collaboration not mentioned in other release notes have been made:
- A new option on the Web UI allows a customer to accept deviations and to update a request
schedule line in one step. Previously, a customer had to accept deviations and update the request
schedule line of a purchase order in two steps.
- If a customer uses the ReplenishmentOrderNotification XML message to send purchase
orders to SAP SNC, he or she can transfer notes without length restriction. Previously, the length of
a note was restricted to 1000 characters when sending a purchase order from SAP ERP to SAP SNC
using the ReplenishmentOrderNotification XML message.
- A customer can transfer the purchasing group from SAP ERP to SAP SNC if he or she sends
purchase orders using XML messages or IDocs.
2.6.22.5 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Exceptions (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, purchase
order (PO) item exceptions are available. A PO item exception is information at the PO item level that
informs the customer or supplier about a delivery-relevant issue for the PO item, such as a deviating
confirmed quantity, a delayed delivery, or a deviating price. For each exception type, a corresponding
new alert type is available.
Note: From the business perspective, an exception and the corresponding alert provide the same
information. They both inform about an exceptional situation. However, they are different from the
technical perspective and are used differently: To select purchase order items according to a particular
exceptional situation on the PO screens, you need the exception type. To display a particular exceptional
situation in the Alert Monitor, you need the alert type.
Effects on Existing Data
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 183
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
You can see exceptions at PO item level, for example, on the Purchase Order Details screen or on the
Work Order Details screen. In the quick view, a new building block is available for PO item exceptions.
The related alerts are visible in the Alert Monitor.
Effects on System Administration
Exceptions for issues related to deviating data, such as the quantity or the delivery date/time, are
automatically generated by SAP SNC when delivery-relevant data changes. However, you as a customer
must run a report (/SCA/PO_CONF_ASN_OVERDUE) to generate exceptions for overdue confirmations,
overdue ASNs, or overdue goods receipt. To access this report, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose
Supply Network Collaboration -> Exceptions -> Generate PO Item Exceptions and PO Item
Alerts for Overdue Responses.
Effects on Customizing
In Customizing for Supply Network Collaboration, you must make the following settings:
- You must activate the Allow Generation of Purchase Order Item Exceptions
(PO_ITEM_EXCEPTION) validation check in the validation profiles that you use for the following
processes:
- SAP SNC receives a PO from the customer back-end system (REPLORDER process).
- The supplier publishes a PO confirmation in SAP SNC (ORDERCONF_PUBLISH process).
- SAP SNC receives a PO confirmation from the supplier back-end system
(REPLORDER_CONFIRMATION process).
You make the settings under Basic Settings -> Validation -> Own Settings -> Maintain Settings
in Validation Profiles.
- You must deactivate the following validation checks in the validation profiles for the relevant
processes:
- For the following validation checks, which check whether the confirmed quantity violates delivery
tolerances, the type of messages that the system creates in case of a tolerance violation must be set
to W (warning) or I (information):
- PO_ITMOVERDELIVERY
- PO_ITMOVERDELIVERY_WITHOUTZERO
- PO_ITMUNDERDELIVERY
- PO_ITMUNDERDELIVERY_WITHOUTZERO
You must make this setting in the validation profiles that you use for the following processes:
- The supplier saves a PO on the SAP SNC Web UI (ORDERCONF_SAVE process). The
standard validation profile is POC2. In the standard system, the message type is W.
- The supplier publishes a PO on the SAP SNC Web UI (ORDERCONF_PUBLISH process). The
standard validation profile is POC3. In the standard system, the alert priority is E (error).
- The supplier receives a PO confirmation from the supplier back-end system
(REPLORDER_CONFIRMATION process). The standard validation profile is POC3. In the
standard system, the alert priority is E.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 184
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
You make the settings under Basic Settings -> Validation -> Own Settings -> Maintain Settings
in Validation Profiles. (Note: If the message type is E, the system does not set the confirmation
status correctly.)
- You must create a number range for exceptions under Purchase Order -> Purchase Order Item
Exceptions -> Determine Number Ranges for Purchase Order Item Exceptions.
- You must create consensus time profiles, consensus quantity profiles, consensus price profiles, and
consensus rules. You make the settings under Basic Settings -> Consensus Finding ->
Consensus Profiles.
- You must add an entry with the following data to the maintenance group CF:
- Counter field: 112
- Application field: CF
- Usages field: RU
- Condition Table field: SAPCDCTY
- Condition Type field: 1000
- Data Source System field: Source: Local
You make the settings under Basic Settings -> Consensus Finding -> Condition Technique for
Consensus Finding -> Create Condition Maintenance Group.
See also
- SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com, under Purchase Order Collaboration -> Special Topics in
Purchase Order Collaboration -> Purchase Order Item Exception
- Release note Quick View (Enhanced)
2.6.22.6 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Groups (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the customer
can group purchase order items automatically or manually. SAP SNC can perform automatic grouping
when receiving a purchase order from the customer's back-end system. Automatic grouping assigns PO
items that refer to the same ERP document to one group. SAP SNC groups according to the following
ERP documents:
- Sales order
- Production order
- Purchase requisition
- WBS element
On the Web user interface (Web UI) of SAP SNC, the customer can create PO item groups manually
according to other, customer-defined criteria or change automatically-created groups. The PO items of a
group can be linked with predecessor-successor relationships. Relationships can be created automatically
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 185
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
for groups based on production orders and purchase requisitions or manually by the customer.
PO item groups enable customers and suppliers to consider dependencies between different purchase
orders or purchase order items in SAP SNC. Using PO item groups, customers and suppliers can identify
and select related PO items on the SAP SNC UI. If exceptions occur for a PO item, such as delays,
customers and suppliers can find the successor items that are affected. Using groups, customer and
supplier can also consider dependencies between work orders that are related.
Effects on Existing Data
- SAP SNC performs automatic grouping if the customer sends a new or updated purchase order to
SAP SNC. Therefore, items of existing purchase orders are only grouped if the customer sends an
updated purchase order.
- The new group screen is available in the Web menu for SAP SNC under Purchase Order.
- On the Purchase Order Details screen or on the Purchase Order Worklist screen, the group
indicator shows whether a purchase order item belongs to a group. Using the group indicator on
these screens, the customer can call up the group screen as well. For the supplier, this function is
only available if the purchase order item belongs to a group.
On the work order header level, the group indicator shows whether the work order was created from
a PO item that is assigned to at least one PO item group.
Effects on Customizing
- If you want to use automatic grouping, you need to activate the Group PO Items Automatically
Based on ERP Document (PO_ITEM GROUP) validation check in the validation profile that you
use for the PO receipt process (REPLORDER). The standard validation profile is POC1. You make
the settings in Customizing for Supply Network Collaboration under Basic Settings ->
Validation.
- For manual grouping, you need to set up number ranges in Customizing for Supply Network
Collaboration under Purchase Order Purchase -> Purchase Order Item Groups -> Determine
Number Ranges for Purchase Order Item Groups.
See also
- SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com,
under Purchase Order Collaboration -> Special Topics in Purchase Order Collaboration ->
Purchase Order Item Group
- Release note SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Collaboration Folders Integration (Enhanced)
2.6.22.7 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Work List (Enhanced)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, a supplier
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 186
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
can display and confirm subcontracting components for subcontract orders in the purchase order worklist.
In addition, the new query object type Purchase Order Items Where I Am Goods Recipient is
available for the supplier. A query based on this worklist object type displays purchase order items for
which the supplier is the goods recipient. The supplier can use the query to find purchase orders upon
which he or she depends. If necessary, the supplier can adjust the confirmations for the purchase orders
for which he or she is the supplier.
Effects on Existing Data
If a schedule line contains subcontracting components, the Confirm popup window contains an additional
table displaying the subcontracting components.
The following additional data is available (when relevant) in the Confirm popup window in the purchase
order worklist:
- Confirmation status of the item
- Approval status of the confirmation schedule line, which is the aggregated approval status of the
subcontracting components.
- Approval status of the item
- Customer batch in the item
See also
SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collablaboration on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com under SAP Supply Network Collaboration -> Purchase Order
Collaboration -> Web Screens for Purchase Orders -> Purchase Order Worklist.
2.6.22.8 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Confirmation (Enhanced)
Use
Previously, you could transfer confirmation data to an SAP ERP back-end system using the
ReplenishmentOrderConfirmation XML message mapped to an Idoc. However, this integration
did not transfer the manufacturer part number data in the confirmation schedule lines of purchase order.
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, a supplier
can send purchase order confirmations to the customer back-end system using
PurchaseOrderERPConfirmationRequest XML messages. This enables you to transfer the
above data to a customer SAP back-end system of enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 187
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Effects on Customizing
To use the PurchaseOrderERPConfirmationRequest XML message when sending purchase
order confirmations, the PO_PURORDERPCNFREQ_SEND validation check must be active in the
validation profile that you use for the PO publication process (ORDERCONF_PUBLISH). In the standard
validation profile POC3 this validation check is inactive. You can activate the validation check in
Customizing for Supply Network Collaboration, under Basic Settings -> Validation -> Own
Settings -> Maintain Settings in Validation Profiles.
See also
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com, under Purchase Order Collaboration -> Integration with an SAP Back-End
System -> Using XML Messages with an SAP ERP Back-End System and Purchase Order
Collaboration -> Special Topics in Purchase Order Collaboration -> Manufacturer Part Number
in Purchase Order Collaboration -> Use of MPNs with an SAP ERP Back-End System.
2.6.22.9 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Replenishment Order (Enhanced)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, if the
customer back-end system or the supplier back-end system does not support multiple items for the same
location product within an order document (for example, to perform follow-up processes that require
single items such as an ATP check for a sales order), SAP SNC can merge promotion and baseline items
of a replenishment order before sending them to an ERP back-end system. If the confirmed quantity for
this merged item is different from the requested quantity, the quantity can be split across the items of the
replenishment order when the confirmation is received in SAP SNC according to different rules. SAP
SNC also merges and splits the items of ASNs that reference such a replenishment order. This new
function is relevant to the Responsive Replenishment scenario.
A new service to publish replenishment orders for firm receipts or for transport load builder (TLB)
shipments is provided on the Web UI and in the planning service manager. You use this service if you
have proposed firm receipts but have not yet published the replenishment orders, or if you have run the
TLB but have not yet published the replenishment orders.
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, a supplier
can now also save and publish a replenishment order in one step.
Effects on Existing Data
The following screens have been enhanced to offer the service for publishing replenishment orders:
- RR Overview
- RR Details
- Min/Max Overview
- Min/Max Details
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 188
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Effects on Customizing
To activate the merging of replenishment order items and to define how quantities are split, see
Customizing for Supply Network Collaboration under Replenishment -> Replenishment Order ->
Define Quantity Split for Promotion and Baseline Items.
See also
SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com,
under SAP Supply Network Collaboration -> Replenishment -> Replenishment Order
Collaboration -> Replenishment Order -> Creating Replenishment Orders -> Merging and
Splitting Items.
2.6.22.10 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Revision Level (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the revision
level is available in the following document types:
- Purchase orders
- Work orders
- Scheduling agreement releases
- Advanced shipping notifications (ASNs)
Effects on Data Transfer
If you want to transmit 2-character revision levels from SAP ERP to SAP SNC, you must implement a
user exit in SAP ERP for the following IDocs:
- IDocs for purchase orders:
- ORDERS05
- ORDINT01 (relevant to service parts planning)
- IDocs for scheduling agreement releases:
- DELFOR01
For more information, see SAP Notes 888599 and 1438427.
If you want to transfer the revision level on component level of a purchase order item, then you must
transfer purchase orders using the PORDCR102 IDoc as of enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0, or
you can use the PurchaseOrderERPReplenishmentOrderCollaborationNotification
XML message.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 189
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
The DespatchedDeliveryNotification XML message contains the revision level. However, in
the standard delivery, the DESADV.DELVRY03 IDoc for receiving an ASN in the ERP system does not
contain the revision level.
2.6.22.11 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens (Enhanced)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, a number of
additional selection parameters are available on various screens..
Effects on Existing Data
On the purchase order worklist, additional selection parameters are available for the worklist object types:
- In the Confirm&Publish Purchase Order Items (Supplier) worklist object type the following
additional selection parameters are available:
- Customer batch
- Item changed on (relative to today)
- Item changed on
- Seller
- Original sales order number
- WBS element
- Approval status
- Exception
- Group indicator
- In the Canceled / Blocked Purchase Order Items (Supplier) worklist object type the following
additional selection parameters are available:
- Product group
- Product group type
- Customer batch
- Item changed on (relative to today)
- Item changed on
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 190
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Seller
- Original sales order number
- WBS element
- Approval status
- Group indicator
- In the Purchase Order Items (Supplier) worklist object type the following additional selection
parameters are available:
- Customer batch
- Item changed on (relative to today)
- Item changed on
- Seller
- Original sales order number
- WBS eement
- Approval satus
- Exception
- Group indicator
- In the Rejected Purchase Order Items worklist object type the following additional selection
parameters are available:
- Customer batch
- Item changed on (relative to today)
- Item changed on
- Group indicator
- Purchasing group
- In the Purchase Order Items (Customer) worklist object type the following additional selection
parameters are available:
- Customer batch
- Item changed on (relative to today)
- Item changed on
- Seller
- Original sales order number
- WBS element
- Approval status
- Exception
- Group indicator
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 191
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Purchasing group
In the supplier view of the due list for purchasing documents, the following additional selection
parameters are available:
- Approval status
- Confirmation status
- Order document type
In the customer view of the due list for purchasing documents, the following additional selection
parameters are available:
- Approval status
- Confirmation status
- Order document type
- Purchasing group
On the Documents Requiring Invoices screen, the shipping date is available as a selection parameter.
The purchasing group is now available as a selection parameter on the following screens:
- Customer worklists for purchase orders as described above
- Customer overview screens for purchase orders, advanced shipping notifications, releases, and
invoices
- Customer due list for purchasing documents (as described above) and the customer receipts and
requirements list
2.6.23 SCM-ICH-PRO Promotion Planning
2.6.23.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network Collaboration 1
(New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the business
function Supply Network Collaboration 1 is available. Whith this business function, you can do the
following, for example:
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 192
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Group purchase orders and work orders to improve visibility and collaboration across the supply
network
- Enable collaboration on quality issues between suppliers and customers using quality notifications
- Improve collaborative planning between SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) and
SAP SNC
- Improve supplier connectivity and ease of operation
- Improve ease of use with bi-directional integration with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management
- Improve visibility and decision support with quick view enhancements
- Improve engineering collaboration with the sharing of documents using Collaboration Folders
- Group ASNs into a single shipment in SAP SNC
- Use miscellaneous ASN enhancements
- Send additional confirmation data to the customer (such as MPN or price)
For more information, see the following release notes:
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Navigation from RR Overview to Data Import Controller (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Replenishment Order (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Promotion Collaboration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Product Prefilter for TLB Runs in PSM (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Groups (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Exceptions (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Work List (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Confirmation (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Customer Batch Number (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order - Miscellaneous (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Shipment Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Advanced Shipping Notifications (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: ASN Alert Types for Release Processing (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Generation of ASN Alerts (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Goods Receipt Messages (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quality Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Integration of Planned Receipts with the Customer (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Manual Change of Inventory Data for SNI (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: User Administration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: SAP SNC Monitoring with CCMS (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Branding (New)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 193
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quick View (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Collaboration Folders Integration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Due List for Pur.Docs. and R/R List (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Revision Level (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Alert Enhancements (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: File Transfer (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Smart Forms (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: BI Extractors (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Software Component SNC IC in ESR (New)
See also
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com, under Business Functions for SAP Supply Network Collaboration.
2.6.23.2 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Promotion Collaboration (Enhanced)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, promotion
collaboration has been enhanced as follows:
- When a customer sends a DemandInfluencingEventNotification XML message
(promotion message) to SAP SNC with promotion data (location products, promotion quantities,
and time buckets) for multiple promotions, the promotion message can only contain one promotion
ID on the header level of the promotion message. To create new promotions or update existing ones,
SAP SNC must first determine if there are existing promotions in SAP SNC that are relevant to the
customer's promotion data. To determine if there are existing promotions, SAP SNC can
automatically search for promotions that exist in SAP SNC. To search for existing promotions, you
have listed all existing promotions in SAP SNC. SAP SNC can use this list to determine if the
customer's promotion data is relevant to existing promotions, or if it must create new promotions.
Once SAP SNC determines which promotion data is relevant, SAP SNC can automatically assign
the time buckets from the promotion message to existing promotions for an update or to new
promotions it has created.
- SAP SNC can determine promotion attributes (event type, promotion description) for the
promotions in promotion messages with multiple promotions.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 194
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- When assigning time buckets to a promotion, you can determine whether SAP SNC uses the
promotion sales forecast data or promotion order forecast data that the customer sends for a location
product.
- You can define an offset value in days that allows SAP SNC to calculate promotion start dates from
the time buckets in the DemandInfluencingEventNotification XML message. SAP SNC
can use the start dates to determine unknown promotion IDs before it applies the promotion offset
profile to calculate relevant promotion dates.
- SAP SNC can aggregate quantities from daily time buckets in the
DemandInfluencingEventNotification XML message to calculate a total promotion
quantity. Based on the total promotion quantity, SAP SNC can use the sales and distribution pattern
from the promotion profile for the creation of multiple promotions.
- SAP SNC can automatically determine the uplift of a promotion based on the promotion data from
the DemandInfluencingEventNotification XML message. To determine the promotion
uplift, SAP SNC calculates the sum of the short-term forecast values for the sales period of the
promotion. SAP SNC then subtracts this number from the promotion quantity that the customer has
maintained and sent by means of the DemandInfluencingEventNotification XML
message. The result gives the supplier the promotion uplift.
- The customer can send in partial updates of promotions. Partial updates are promotion updates
where only some of the location products have been changed.
Effects on Existing Data
The title of the Customizing activity Define Expected Promotion IDs has been changed to Define
Settings for Inbound Processing of Promotion XML Message.
Effects on Customizing
For promotion collaboration the following Customizing activities are enhanced or new:
- The Define Settings for Inbound Processing of Promotion XML Message activity in
Customizing for Supply Network Collaboration under Demand -> Promotion -> Settings for
Inbound Promotion XML Messages has been enhanced. You make now make the following
settings:
- You can set up the assignment of time buckets from a
DemandInfluencingEventNotification XML message to promotions.
- You can maintain the offset to calculate the promotion dates the system uses to create
promotions by splitting the promotion data.
- You can determine which time series data you want to use when splitting promotion data for
the creation or update of a promotion.
- You can aggregate the promotion quantities of the daily time buckets in the XML message and
use the sales and distribution pattern from the promotion profile for the creation of multiple
promotions.
- You can set up partial updates.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 195
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- You can set up the automatic calculation of the promotion uplift.
- You can determine if the system considers the removal of a promotion item from a promotion
in a XML message an update.
- The Determine Promotion IDs activity in Customizing for Supply Network Collaboration under
Demand -> Promotion -> Settings for Inbound Promotion XML Messages is new. You list
your existing promotions and a promotion ID.
- The Determine Promotion Attributes activity in Customizing for Supply Network Collaboration
under Demand -> Promotion -> Settings for Inbound Promotion XML Messages is new. You
list the attributes of existing promotions, for example the event type.
The following Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) have been chjanged or are new:
- To use the brand size pack for a product instead of the product hierarchy in the Customizing activity
Determine Promotion IDs, you can use the new method DETERMINE_BSP from the existing
BAdI Maintain Settings for Promotion Planning (/SAPAPO/ICH_PROM_EXT).
- To change or extend the search parameters for the determination of promotion IDs, you can use the
new BAdI Determine Promotion IDs (/SAPAPO/ICH_PROMID_DET).
- To change or extend the search parameters for the determination of promotion attributes, you can
use the new BAdI Determine Promotion Attributes (/SAPAPO/ICH_PROM_ATTR).
See also
For more information, see the main release note for the business function Supply Network
Collaboration 1 (SCM_SNC_GEN_1) and SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP
Help Portal at http://help.sap.com, under SAP Supply Network Collaboration -> Demand ->
Promotion Planning -> Creating and Updating Promotions from Promotion Messages.
2.6.24 SCM-ICH-QM Quality
2.6.24.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Advanced Shipping Notifications
(Enhanced)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, processing of
advanced shipping notifications (ASNs) has been enhanced with the following new features:
- Supplier and customer batch numbers
On the ASN Details screen, ASN History screen, and ASN History Comparison screen, the new
Supplier Batch Number field has been added. The Batch Number field has been renamed to
Customer Batch Number.
- New Last Published field
On the ASN Details screen, on the Admin Details tab page, the new Last Published field has been
added.
- Shipment Assignment
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 196
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
On the following screens, the new Shipment Assigned field has been added, which shows whether
an ASN is assigned to a shipment:
- ASN Overview screen
- Shipping Details tab page of the ASN Details screen
You can navigate to the shipment by clicking the shipment number.
- New ASN alerts for shipment collaboration
To support the integration with the new Shipment Collaboration component, the following new
ASN alerts have been introduced:
- Overdue ASN Is Not Yet in Shipment
- ASN Delivery Date Was Overwritten by Shipment
- Calculation of total weights and volumes
The new pushbutton Calculate Totals has been added to the ASN Details screen. If you choose
this pushbutton, the system calculates the total gross weight, the total net weight, and the total
volume of an ASN and their respective units of measurement. Note that the system only calculates
the total weights and volumes if the user has not entered manual values.
- ASN-based due quantities
When you publish an ASN, the system automatically updates the ASN-based due quantity in the
schedule line of the referenced scheduling agreement release. The due quantities are now displayed
on the Due List for Purchasing Documents screen.
- Copy of ASN item
On the Create ASN screen and the ASN Details (Supplier) screen, in change mode, you can use
the new Copy Item pushbutton to create a new item based on a selected item.
- Integration with the new Quality Collaboration component
From the ASN Overview and the ASN Details screens, you can navigate to the quality
notifications that are related to an ASN.
- Number of goods receipt document in Received Delivery Notification inbound operation
The Received Delivery Notification inbound enterprise service operation was enhanced in such a
way that it can now also receive the number of the referenced goods receipt document at item level.
Effects on Existing Data
Effects on Screens
The ASN Overview screen has been redesigned with the personal objects worklist (POWL) technology.
Effects on ASN-Based Due Quantities
After you have activated the business function Supply Network Collaboration 1 (SCM_SNC_GEN_1),
you must run the report Due Quantity Computing and Setting Change Status Flag in SA Releases
(/SCA/REL_DUE_CHG_SET). The report calculates the ASN-based due quantity for existing
scheduling agreement releases. For more information, see the report documentation.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 197
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
See also
For more information, see the following documentation:
- Main release note for the Business Function Supply Network Collaboration 1 (New)
- SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com under SAP Supply Network Collaboration -> Delivery
Collaboration -> ASN Processing
- Release note ASN Alert Types for Release Processing (Enhanced)
- Release note Generation of ASN Alerts (Enhanced)
- Release note Shipment Collaboration (New)
- Release note Quality Collaboration (New)
2.6.24.2 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network Collaboration 1
(New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the business
function Supply Network Collaboration 1 is available. Whith this business function, you can do the
following, for example:
- Group purchase orders and work orders to improve visibility and collaboration across the supply
network
- Enable collaboration on quality issues between suppliers and customers using quality notifications
- Improve collaborative planning between SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) and
SAP SNC
- Improve supplier connectivity and ease of operation
- Improve ease of use with bi-directional integration with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management
- Improve visibility and decision support with quick view enhancements
- Improve engineering collaboration with the sharing of documents using Collaboration Folders
- Group ASNs into a single shipment in SAP SNC
- Use miscellaneous ASN enhancements
- Send additional confirmation data to the customer (such as MPN or price)
For more information, see the following release notes:
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Navigation from RR Overview to Data Import Controller (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Replenishment Order (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Promotion Collaboration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Product Prefilter for TLB Runs in PSM (New)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 198
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Groups (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Exceptions (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Work List (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Confirmation (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Customer Batch Number (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order - Miscellaneous (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Shipment Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Advanced Shipping Notifications (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: ASN Alert Types for Release Processing (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Generation of ASN Alerts (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Goods Receipt Messages (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quality Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Integration of Planned Receipts with the Customer (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Manual Change of Inventory Data for SNI (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: User Administration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: SAP SNC Monitoring with CCMS (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Branding (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quick View (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Collaboration Folders Integration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Due List for Pur.Docs. and R/R List (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Revision Level (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Alert Enhancements (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: File Transfer (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Smart Forms (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: BI Extractors (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Software Component SNC IC in ESR (New)
See also
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 199
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
http://help.sap.com, under Business Functions for SAP Supply Network Collaboration.
2.6.24.3 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quality Collaboration (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, suppliers and
customers can use SAP SNC to notify each other of quality problems or other issues with products or
subcontracting components during the manufacturing process or after delivery, so that the customer or
supplier can react to the complaint.
Quality Notifications
The central object for quality collaboration in SAP SNC is the quality notification.
A supplier can create quality notifications on the SAP SNC Web user interface (Web UI). He or she can
either save these as drafts or publish them so that they are sent to a customer back-end system. SAP SNC
can also receive quality notifications created by a customer in his or her back-end system.
Suppliers and customers can use statuses to record the current stage of processing. Changes to quality
notifications can be transferred back and forth between SAP SNC and a customer back-end system.
Suppliers and customers can use subject codes to classify a quality notification according to the defects or
problems being reported. On item level, suppliers and customers can use defect type codes to identify the
type of problem being reported in the item.
Integration with a Back-End System
SAP SNC supports the integration of quality collaboration with an SAP customer back-end systems as of
enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0 that has the Quality Management: Extensions in FMEA and
Q-Notifications (OPS_QM_EXTENSION_2) business function activated. You can use
QualityIssueNotificationSUITENotification messages to transfer quality notifications
between SAP SNC and the customer back-end system.
Integration with Other SAP SNC Applications
You can use quality collaboration in conjunction with ASN processing, purchase order processing, and
work order processing. A supplier or customer can reference an ASN, purchase order, sales order or work
order in a quality notification. You can view quality notifications related to purchase orders, work orders
and ASNs directly from the respective details screens and from the purchase order and ASN overview
screens for these order document types. In addition, a supplier can create a quality notification for a
purchase order item or a component directly from the purchase order details screen as well as for a work
order in- and output component on the work order details screen.
Integration with Collaboration Folders (cFolders)
A supplier and customer can use cFolders to store and share additional files that are relevant to a quality
notification.
Effects on Existing Data
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 200
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Effects on Menus
The Web menu for customers and suppliers in SAP SNC has been enhanced by the following entry:
Quality. The area menu has been enhanced by the following new entry: Supply Network Collaboration
-> Quality.
Effects on Existing Screens
On the PO Overview, PO Details, ASN Overview screens, the new QN Created field has been added
that shows whether an quality notification has been created that references the purchase order. A
pushbutton to navigate to relevant quality notifications has been added to the following screens:
- PO Details
- Work Order Details
- ASN Details
Effects on Order Document Management
After the activation of the business function Supply Network Collaboration 1 (SCM_SNC_GEN_1),
you must perform some manual steps to activate order document management (ODM) for quality
notifications. For more information, see SAP Note 1338993.
Effects on System Administration
New Reports
As a customer, you can use the following new reports to handle unneeded quality notificaitons or quality
notifications that have not been published correctly:
- Generate and Publish XML Message for Quality Notification (/SCA/QIN_PUBLISH)
This report is used to re-send the outbound XML message for any quality notification that has been
published, but for which the sending of an XML message failed.
- Close Quality Notifications (/SCA/QNOT_CLOSE)
You use this report to close quality notifications that have the Completed status.
- Delete Quality Notifications (/SCA/QNOT_DELETE)
You use this report to delete quality notifications that have been closed.
Report for Generating Alerts
The Generate Alerts for Quality Notifications (/SCA/QNOT_ALERT) generates alerts for quality
notifications that should already be closed based on their required end date, but that are still open. The
report can be run directly or scheduled as a job for regular run
Roles
The following roles have been enhanced to include authorizations to call up the new quality collaboration
supplier or customer screens:
- Supplier Collaboration: Superuser and Administrator (Supplier) (SAP_SCM_ICH_SU_SUP)
- Supplier Collaboration: Administrator (Customer) (SAP_SCM_ICH_ADM_CUS)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 201
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Supplier Collaboration: Superuser (Customer) (SAP_SCM_ICH_SU_CUS)
The new Quality Collaboration (Supplier) (SAP_SCM_ICH_QN_SUP) role is also available.
Effects on Customizing
You make the settings for quality collaboration in Customizing for Supply Network Collaboration
under Quality.
You can transfer the Customizing data from SAP ERP to SAP SNC using the Customizing Distribution
function in SAP Solution Manager. This copies Customizing entries to temporary tables in SAP SNC.
The /SCA/QN_FILL_CUST report in SAP SNC is then used to adjust the entries so that they fit the SNC
tables and then move the entries to the SAP SNC Customizing tables.
Business Add-Ins are available for processing quality notifications that you can call up under Business
Add-Ins (BAdIs) for SAP SNC -> Quality -> Processing Inbound and Outbound Messages.
To change outbound data processing of the QualityIssueNotificationSUITENotification
XML message, you can use the /SCA/BIF_O_QINSUITENOT BAdI (see Supply Network
Collaboration -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for SAP SNC -> Basic Settings -> Processing
Inbound and Outbound Messages -> BAdIs for Message Interfaces (Outbound XML Messages)
-> BAdI for QualityIssueNotificationSUITENotification_Out).
To change inbound data processing of the QualityIssueNotificationSUITENotification
XML message, you can use the /SCA/BIF_I_QINSUITENOT BAdI (see Supply Network
Collaboration -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for SAP SNC -> Basic Settings -> Processing
Inbound and Outbound Messages -> BAdIs for Message Interfaces (Outbound XML Messages)
-> BAdI for QualityIssueNotificationSUITENotification_In).
See also
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com, under Quality Collaboration.
2.6.25 SCM-ICH-REL Scheduling Agreement Release
2.6.25.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Advanced Shipping Notifications
(Enhanced)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, processing of
advanced shipping notifications (ASNs) has been enhanced with the following new features:
- Supplier and customer batch numbers
On the ASN Details screen, ASN History screen, and ASN History Comparison screen, the new
Supplier Batch Number field has been added. The Batch Number field has been renamed to
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 202
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
Customer Batch Number.
- New Last Published field
On the ASN Details screen, on the Admin Details tab page, the new Last Published field has been
added.
- Shipment Assignment
On the following screens, the new Shipment Assigned field has been added, which shows whether
an ASN is assigned to a shipment:
- ASN Overview screen
- Shipping Details tab page of the ASN Details screen
You can navigate to the shipment by clicking the shipment number.
- New ASN alerts for shipment collaboration
To support the integration with the new Shipment Collaboration component, the following new
ASN alerts have been introduced:
- Overdue ASN Is Not Yet in Shipment
- ASN Delivery Date Was Overwritten by Shipment
- Calculation of total weights and volumes
The new pushbutton Calculate Totals has been added to the ASN Details screen. If you choose
this pushbutton, the system calculates the total gross weight, the total net weight, and the total
volume of an ASN and their respective units of measurement. Note that the system only calculates
the total weights and volumes if the user has not entered manual values.
- ASN-based due quantities
When you publish an ASN, the system automatically updates the ASN-based due quantity in the
schedule line of the referenced scheduling agreement release. The due quantities are now displayed
on the Due List for Purchasing Documents screen.
- Copy of ASN item
On the Create ASN screen and the ASN Details (Supplier) screen, in change mode, you can use
the new Copy Item pushbutton to create a new item based on a selected item.
- Integration with the new Quality Collaboration component
From the ASN Overview and the ASN Details screens, you can navigate to the quality
notifications that are related to an ASN.
- Number of goods receipt document in Received Delivery Notification inbound operation
The Received Delivery Notification inbound enterprise service operation was enhanced in such a
way that it can now also receive the number of the referenced goods receipt document at item level.
Effects on Existing Data
Effects on Screens
The ASN Overview screen has been redesigned with the personal objects worklist (POWL) technology.
Effects on ASN-Based Due Quantities
After you have activated the business function Supply Network Collaboration 1 (SCM_SNC_GEN_1),
you must run the report Due Quantity Computing and Setting Change Status Flag in SA Releases
(/SCA/REL_DUE_CHG_SET). The report calculates the ASN-based due quantity for existing
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 203
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
scheduling agreement releases. For more information, see the report documentation.
See also
For more information, see the following documentation:
- Main release note for the Business Function Supply Network Collaboration 1 (New)
- SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com under SAP Supply Network Collaboration -> Delivery
Collaboration -> ASN Processing
- Release note ASN Alert Types for Release Processing (Enhanced)
- Release note Generation of ASN Alerts (Enhanced)
- Release note Shipment Collaboration (New)
- Release note Quality Collaboration (New)
2.6.25.2 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: ASN Alert Types for Release Processing
(Enhanced)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, new ASN
alerts types are available for release processing (alert types 7437 to 7444). The alerts inform about
deviations between the ASN item data (quantity and delivery date/time) and the corresponding data in the
request schedule lines or in the confirmation schedule lines of the current scheduling agreement release.
SAP SNC creates or updates these alerts automatically upon publication of an ASN or upon receipt of the
successor release.
See also
SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com,
under Delivery Collaboration -> ASN Processing -> ASN Alerts -> Generation of Alerts for
Non-Matching ASNs in Release Processing
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 204
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
2.6.25.3 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Due List for Pur.Docs. and R/R List (Changed)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, you can
navigate from the receipts and requirements list to the relevant detail screen of a receipt or requirement
element. This feature is available for the following order documents:
- ASN
- Purchase order confirmation
- Purchase order
- Forecast delivery schedule
- JIT delivery schedule
- Scheduling agreement confirmation
- Replenishment order
You can navigate from the due list for purchasing documents, (Order Doc. Number column), using a
link to the respective order document type detail screen, which, depending on the document type is either
the purchase order details screen, the replenishment order details screen, or the release details screen.
2.6.25.4 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network Collaboration 1
(New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the business
function Supply Network Collaboration 1 is available. Whith this business function, you can do the
following, for example:
- Group purchase orders and work orders to improve visibility and collaboration across the supply
network
- Enable collaboration on quality issues between suppliers and customers using quality notifications
- Improve collaborative planning between SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) and
SAP SNC
- Improve supplier connectivity and ease of operation
- Improve ease of use with bi-directional integration with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 205
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Improve visibility and decision support with quick view enhancements
- Improve engineering collaboration with the sharing of documents using Collaboration Folders
- Group ASNs into a single shipment in SAP SNC
- Use miscellaneous ASN enhancements
- Send additional confirmation data to the customer (such as MPN or price)
For more information, see the following release notes:
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Navigation from RR Overview to Data Import Controller (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Replenishment Order (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Promotion Collaboration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Product Prefilter for TLB Runs in PSM (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Groups (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Exceptions (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Work List (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Confirmation (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Customer Batch Number (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order - Miscellaneous (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Shipment Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Advanced Shipping Notifications (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: ASN Alert Types for Release Processing (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Generation of ASN Alerts (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Goods Receipt Messages (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quality Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Integration of Planned Receipts with the Customer (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Manual Change of Inventory Data for SNI (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: User Administration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: SAP SNC Monitoring with CCMS (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Branding (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quick View (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Collaboration Folders Integration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Due List for Pur.Docs. and R/R List (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Revision Level (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Alert Enhancements (Enhanced)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 206
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: File Transfer (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Smart Forms (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: BI Extractors (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Software Component SNC IC in ESR (New)
See also
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com, under Business Functions for SAP Supply Network Collaboration.
2.6.25.5 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Revision Level (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the revision
level is available in the following document types:
- Purchase orders
- Work orders
- Scheduling agreement releases
- Advanced shipping notifications (ASNs)
Effects on Data Transfer
If you want to transmit 2-character revision levels from SAP ERP to SAP SNC, you must implement a
user exit in SAP ERP for the following IDocs:
- IDocs for purchase orders:
- ORDERS05
- ORDINT01 (relevant to service parts planning)
- IDocs for scheduling agreement releases:
- DELFOR01
For more information, see SAP Notes 888599 and 1438427.
If you want to transfer the revision level on component level of a purchase order item, then you must
transfer purchase orders using the PORDCR102 IDoc as of enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0, or
you can use the PurchaseOrderERPReplenishmentOrderCollaborationNotification
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 207
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
XML message.
The DespatchedDeliveryNotification XML message contains the revision level. However, in
the standard delivery, the DESADV.DELVRY03 IDoc for receiving an ASN in the ERP system does not
contain the revision level.
2.6.25.6 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens (Enhanced)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, a number of
additional selection parameters are available on various screens..
Effects on Existing Data
On the purchase order worklist, additional selection parameters are available for the worklist object types:
- In the Confirm&Publish Purchase Order Items (Supplier) worklist object type the following
additional selection parameters are available:
- Customer batch
- Item changed on (relative to today)
- Item changed on
- Seller
- Original sales order number
- WBS element
- Approval status
- Exception
- Group indicator
- In the Canceled / Blocked Purchase Order Items (Supplier) worklist object type the following
additional selection parameters are available:
- Product group
- Product group type
- Customer batch
- Item changed on (relative to today)
- Item changed on
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 208
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Seller
- Original sales order number
- WBS element
- Approval status
- Group indicator
- In the Purchase Order Items (Supplier) worklist object type the following additional selection
parameters are available:
- Customer batch
- Item changed on (relative to today)
- Item changed on
- Seller
- Original sales order number
- WBS eement
- Approval satus
- Exception
- Group indicator
- In the Rejected Purchase Order Items worklist object type the following additional selection
parameters are available:
- Customer batch
- Item changed on (relative to today)
- Item changed on
- Group indicator
- Purchasing group
- In the Purchase Order Items (Customer) worklist object type the following additional selection
parameters are available:
- Customer batch
- Item changed on (relative to today)
- Item changed on
- Seller
- Original sales order number
- WBS element
- Approval status
- Exception
- Group indicator
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 209
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Purchasing group
In the supplier view of the due list for purchasing documents, the following additional selection
parameters are available:
- Approval status
- Confirmation status
- Order document type
In the customer view of the due list for purchasing documents, the following additional selection
parameters are available:
- Approval status
- Confirmation status
- Order document type
- Purchasing group
On the Documents Requiring Invoices screen, the shipping date is available as a selection parameter.
The purchasing group is now available as a selection parameter on the following screens:
- Customer worklists for purchase orders as described above
- Customer overview screens for purchase orders, advanced shipping notifications, releases, and
invoices
- Customer due list for purchasing documents (as described above) and the customer receipts and
requirements list
2.6.26 SCM-ICH-REP Reporting
2.6.26.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network Collaboration 1
(New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the business
function Supply Network Collaboration 1 is available. Whith this business function, you can do the
following, for example:
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 210
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Group purchase orders and work orders to improve visibility and collaboration across the supply
network
- Enable collaboration on quality issues between suppliers and customers using quality notifications
- Improve collaborative planning between SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) and
SAP SNC
- Improve supplier connectivity and ease of operation
- Improve ease of use with bi-directional integration with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management
- Improve visibility and decision support with quick view enhancements
- Improve engineering collaboration with the sharing of documents using Collaboration Folders
- Group ASNs into a single shipment in SAP SNC
- Use miscellaneous ASN enhancements
- Send additional confirmation data to the customer (such as MPN or price)
For more information, see the following release notes:
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Navigation from RR Overview to Data Import Controller (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Replenishment Order (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Promotion Collaboration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Product Prefilter for TLB Runs in PSM (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Groups (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Exceptions (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Work List (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Confirmation (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Customer Batch Number (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order - Miscellaneous (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Shipment Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Advanced Shipping Notifications (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: ASN Alert Types for Release Processing (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Generation of ASN Alerts (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Goods Receipt Messages (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quality Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Integration of Planned Receipts with the Customer (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Manual Change of Inventory Data for SNI (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: User Administration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: SAP SNC Monitoring with CCMS (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Branding (New)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 211
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quick View (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Collaboration Folders Integration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Due List for Pur.Docs. and R/R List (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Revision Level (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Alert Enhancements (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: File Transfer (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Smart Forms (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: BI Extractors (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Software Component SNC IC in ESR (New)
See also
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com, under Business Functions for SAP Supply Network Collaboration.
2.6.27 SCM-ICH-RET Returns
2.6.27.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network Collaboration 1
(New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the business
function Supply Network Collaboration 1 is available. Whith this business function, you can do the
following, for example:
- Group purchase orders and work orders to improve visibility and collaboration across the supply
network
- Enable collaboration on quality issues between suppliers and customers using quality notifications
- Improve collaborative planning between SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) and
SAP SNC
- Improve supplier connectivity and ease of operation
- Improve ease of use with bi-directional integration with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management
- Improve visibility and decision support with quick view enhancements
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 212
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Improve engineering collaboration with the sharing of documents using Collaboration Folders
- Group ASNs into a single shipment in SAP SNC
- Use miscellaneous ASN enhancements
- Send additional confirmation data to the customer (such as MPN or price)
For more information, see the following release notes:
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Navigation from RR Overview to Data Import Controller (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Replenishment Order (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Promotion Collaboration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Product Prefilter for TLB Runs in PSM (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Groups (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Exceptions (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Work List (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Confirmation (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Customer Batch Number (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order - Miscellaneous (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Shipment Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Advanced Shipping Notifications (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: ASN Alert Types for Release Processing (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Generation of ASN Alerts (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Goods Receipt Messages (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quality Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Integration of Planned Receipts with the Customer (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Manual Change of Inventory Data for SNI (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: User Administration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: SAP SNC Monitoring with CCMS (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Branding (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quick View (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Collaboration Folders Integration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Due List for Pur.Docs. and R/R List (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Revision Level (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Alert Enhancements (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: File Transfer (Enhanced)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 213
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Smart Forms (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: BI Extractors (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Software Component SNC IC in ESR (New)
See also
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com, under Business Functions for SAP Supply Network Collaboration.
2.6.28 SCM-ICH-SCO Supplier Confirmations
2.6.28.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network Collaboration 1
(New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the business
function Supply Network Collaboration 1 is available. Whith this business function, you can do the
following, for example:
- Group purchase orders and work orders to improve visibility and collaboration across the supply
network
- Enable collaboration on quality issues between suppliers and customers using quality notifications
- Improve collaborative planning between SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) and
SAP SNC
- Improve supplier connectivity and ease of operation
- Improve ease of use with bi-directional integration with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management
- Improve visibility and decision support with quick view enhancements
- Improve engineering collaboration with the sharing of documents using Collaboration Folders
- Group ASNs into a single shipment in SAP SNC
- Use miscellaneous ASN enhancements
- Send additional confirmation data to the customer (such as MPN or price)
For more information, see the following release notes:
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Navigation from RR Overview to Data Import Controller (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Replenishment Order (Enhanced)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 214
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Promotion Collaboration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Product Prefilter for TLB Runs in PSM (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Groups (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Exceptions (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Work List (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Confirmation (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Customer Batch Number (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order - Miscellaneous (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Shipment Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Advanced Shipping Notifications (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: ASN Alert Types for Release Processing (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Generation of ASN Alerts (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Goods Receipt Messages (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quality Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Integration of Planned Receipts with the Customer (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Manual Change of Inventory Data for SNI (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: User Administration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: SAP SNC Monitoring with CCMS (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Branding (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quick View (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Collaboration Folders Integration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Due List for Pur.Docs. and R/R List (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Revision Level (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Alert Enhancements (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: File Transfer (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Smart Forms (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: BI Extractors (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Software Component SNC IC in ESR (New)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 215
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
See also
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com, under Business Functions for SAP Supply Network Collaboration.
2.6.29 SCM-ICH-SNI Supply Network Inventory
2.6.29.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network Collaboration 1
(New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the business
function Supply Network Collaboration 1 is available. Whith this business function, you can do the
following, for example:
- Group purchase orders and work orders to improve visibility and collaboration across the supply
network
- Enable collaboration on quality issues between suppliers and customers using quality notifications
- Improve collaborative planning between SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) and
SAP SNC
- Improve supplier connectivity and ease of operation
- Improve ease of use with bi-directional integration with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management
- Improve visibility and decision support with quick view enhancements
- Improve engineering collaboration with the sharing of documents using Collaboration Folders
- Group ASNs into a single shipment in SAP SNC
- Use miscellaneous ASN enhancements
- Send additional confirmation data to the customer (such as MPN or price)
For more information, see the following release notes:
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Navigation from RR Overview to Data Import Controller (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Replenishment Order (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Promotion Collaboration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Product Prefilter for TLB Runs in PSM (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Groups (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Exceptions (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Work List (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Confirmation (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Customer Batch Number (Changed)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 216
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order - Miscellaneous (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Shipment Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Advanced Shipping Notifications (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: ASN Alert Types for Release Processing (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Generation of ASN Alerts (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Goods Receipt Messages (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quality Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Integration of Planned Receipts with the Customer (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Manual Change of Inventory Data for SNI (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: User Administration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: SAP SNC Monitoring with CCMS (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Branding (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quick View (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Collaboration Folders Integration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Due List for Pur.Docs. and R/R List (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Revision Level (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Alert Enhancements (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: File Transfer (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Smart Forms (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: BI Extractors (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Software Component SNC IC in ESR (New)
See also
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com, under Business Functions for SAP Supply Network Collaboration.
2.6.29.2 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Manual Change of Inventory Data for SNI (New)
Use
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 217
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, you can
manually change inventory data on the supplier view of the Inventory Overview screen for Supply
Network Inventory. You can only modify inventory data if the business partner to whom you belong is
the data-providing partner of that inventory data.
Effects on Data Transfer
Inventory data coming from XML message exchange or from file transfer overwrites manually changed
data. Manual changes of inventory data also overwrite inventory data that has been received from XML
messages or file transfer.
See also
For more information, see the following:
- Main release note for the Business Function Supply Network Collaboration 1 (New)
- SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com under SAP Supply Network Collaboration -> Supply Network
Inventory -> Web Screens in the SNI Monitor -> Manual Change of Inventory Data
2.6.29.3 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens (Enhanced)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, a number of
additional selection parameters are available on various screens..
Effects on Existing Data
On the purchase order worklist, additional selection parameters are available for the worklist object types:
- In the Confirm&Publish Purchase Order Items (Supplier) worklist object type the following
additional selection parameters are available:
- Customer batch
- Item changed on (relative to today)
- Item changed on
- Seller
- Original sales order number
- WBS element
- Approval status
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 218
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Exception
- Group indicator
- In the Canceled / Blocked Purchase Order Items (Supplier) worklist object type the following
additional selection parameters are available:
- Product group
- Product group type
- Customer batch
- Item changed on (relative to today)
- Item changed on
- Seller
- Original sales order number
- WBS element
- Approval status
- Group indicator
- In the Purchase Order Items (Supplier) worklist object type the following additional selection
parameters are available:
- Customer batch
- Item changed on (relative to today)
- Item changed on
- Seller
- Original sales order number
- WBS eement
- Approval satus
- Exception
- Group indicator
- In the Rejected Purchase Order Items worklist object type the following additional selection
parameters are available:
- Customer batch
- Item changed on (relative to today)
- Item changed on
- Group indicator
- Purchasing group
- In the Purchase Order Items (Customer) worklist object type the following additional selection
parameters are available:
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 219
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Customer batch
- Item changed on (relative to today)
- Item changed on
- Seller
- Original sales order number
- WBS element
- Approval status
- Exception
- Group indicator
- Purchasing group
In the supplier view of the due list for purchasing documents, the following additional selection
parameters are available:
- Approval status
- Confirmation status
- Order document type
In the customer view of the due list for purchasing documents, the following additional selection
parameters are available:
- Approval status
- Confirmation status
- Order document type
- Purchasing group
On the Documents Requiring Invoices screen, the shipping date is available as a selection parameter.
The purchasing group is now available as a selection parameter on the following screens:
- Customer worklists for purchase orders as described above
- Customer overview screens for purchase orders, advanced shipping notifications, releases, and
invoices
- Customer due list for purchasing documents (as described above) and the customer receipts and
requirements list
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 220
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
2.6.30 SCM-ICH-TLB Transport Load Builder
2.6.30.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network Collaboration 1
(New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the business
function Supply Network Collaboration 1 is available. Whith this business function, you can do the
following, for example:
- Group purchase orders and work orders to improve visibility and collaboration across the supply
network
- Enable collaboration on quality issues between suppliers and customers using quality notifications
- Improve collaborative planning between SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) and
SAP SNC
- Improve supplier connectivity and ease of operation
- Improve ease of use with bi-directional integration with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management
- Improve visibility and decision support with quick view enhancements
- Improve engineering collaboration with the sharing of documents using Collaboration Folders
- Group ASNs into a single shipment in SAP SNC
- Use miscellaneous ASN enhancements
- Send additional confirmation data to the customer (such as MPN or price)
For more information, see the following release notes:
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Navigation from RR Overview to Data Import Controller (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Replenishment Order (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Promotion Collaboration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Product Prefilter for TLB Runs in PSM (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Groups (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Exceptions (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Work List (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Confirmation (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Customer Batch Number (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order - Miscellaneous (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Shipment Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Advanced Shipping Notifications (Enhanced)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 221
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: ASN Alert Types for Release Processing (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Generation of ASN Alerts (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Goods Receipt Messages (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quality Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Integration of Planned Receipts with the Customer (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Manual Change of Inventory Data for SNI (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: User Administration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: SAP SNC Monitoring with CCMS (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Branding (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quick View (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Collaboration Folders Integration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Due List for Pur.Docs. and R/R List (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Revision Level (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Alert Enhancements (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: File Transfer (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Smart Forms (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: BI Extractors (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Software Component SNC IC in ESR (New)
See also
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com, under Business Functions for SAP Supply Network Collaboration.
2.6.30.2 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Product Prefilter for TLB Runs in PSM (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, a product
prefilter is available. Using the prefilter, you can achieve a performance improvement for the TLB runs,
provided that all of the following conditions are met:
- A selection that you use for a TLB run (selection type PE_LANE) meets the following conditions:
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 222
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- In the selection, you have specified no products.
- The All Products option is selected for all transportation lanes.
- All Products means a relatively high number of products.
- For only a few products on the transportation lanes, planned receipts or unpublished replenishment
orders exist in the system.
If these prerequisites are not met, we recommend that you do not switch on the location product prefilter.
Note that this setting is client-dependent.
Effects on Customizing
You activate the location product prefilter in Customizing for Supply Network Collaboration under
Replenishment -> Transport Load Builder -> Activate Product Prefilter for TLB Runs in the
Planning Service Manager.
2.6.31 SCM-ICH-WO Work Order
2.6.31.1 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Business Function Supply Network Collaboration 1
(New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the business
function Supply Network Collaboration 1 is available. Whith this business function, you can do the
following, for example:
- Group purchase orders and work orders to improve visibility and collaboration across the supply
network
- Enable collaboration on quality issues between suppliers and customers using quality notifications
- Improve collaborative planning between SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) and
SAP SNC
- Improve supplier connectivity and ease of operation
- Improve ease of use with bi-directional integration with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management
- Improve visibility and decision support with quick view enhancements
- Improve engineering collaboration with the sharing of documents using Collaboration Folders
- Group ASNs into a single shipment in SAP SNC
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 223
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Use miscellaneous ASN enhancements
- Send additional confirmation data to the customer (such as MPN or price)
For more information, see the following release notes:
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Navigation from RR Overview to Data Import Controller (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Replenishment Order (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Promotion Collaboration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Product Prefilter for TLB Runs in PSM (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Groups (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Exceptions (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Work List (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Confirmation (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Customer Batch Number (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order - Miscellaneous (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Shipment Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Advanced Shipping Notifications (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: ASN Alert Types for Release Processing (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Generation of ASN Alerts (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Processing of Goods Receipt Messages (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quality Collaboration (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Integration of Planned Receipts with the Customer (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Manual Change of Inventory Data for SNI (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: User Administration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: SAP SNC Monitoring with CCMS (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Branding (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Quick View (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Collaboration Folders Integration (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Due List for Pur.Docs. and R/R List (Changed)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Revision Level (New)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Alert Enhancements (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: File Transfer (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Smart Forms (Enhanced)
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: BI Extractors (Enhanced)
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 224
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Software Component SNC IC in ESR (New)
See also
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com, under Business Functions for SAP Supply Network Collaboration.
2.6.31.2 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Purchase Order Item Groups (New)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, the customer
can group purchase order items automatically or manually. SAP SNC can perform automatic grouping
when receiving a purchase order from the customer's back-end system. Automatic grouping assigns PO
items that refer to the same ERP document to one group. SAP SNC groups according to the following
ERP documents:
- Sales order
- Production order
- Purchase requisition
- WBS element
On the Web user interface (Web UI) of SAP SNC, the customer can create PO item groups manually
according to other, customer-defined criteria or change automatically-created groups. The PO items of a
group can be linked with predecessor-successor relationships. Relationships can be created automatically
for groups based on production orders and purchase requisitions or manually by the customer.
PO item groups enable customers and suppliers to consider dependencies between different purchase
orders or purchase order items in SAP SNC. Using PO item groups, customers and suppliers can identify
and select related PO items on the SAP SNC UI. If exceptions occur for a PO item, such as delays,
customers and suppliers can find the successor items that are affected. Using groups, customer and
supplier can also consider dependencies between work orders that are related.
Effects on Existing Data
- SAP SNC performs automatic grouping if the customer sends a new or updated purchase order to
SAP SNC. Therefore, items of existing purchase orders are only grouped if the customer sends an
updated purchase order.
- The new group screen is available in the Web menu for SAP SNC under Purchase Order.
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 225
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- On the Purchase Order Details screen or on the Purchase Order Worklist screen, the group
indicator shows whether a purchase order item belongs to a group. Using the group indicator on
these screens, the customer can call up the group screen as well. For the supplier, this function is
only available if the purchase order item belongs to a group.
On the work order header level, the group indicator shows whether the work order was created from
a PO item that is assigned to at least one PO item group.
Effects on Customizing
- If you want to use automatic grouping, you need to activate the Group PO Items Automatically
Based on ERP Document (PO_ITEM GROUP) validation check in the validation profile that you
use for the PO receipt process (REPLORDER). The standard validation profile is POC1. You make
the settings in Customizing for Supply Network Collaboration under Basic Settings ->
Validation.
- For manual grouping, you need to set up number ranges in Customizing for Supply Network
Collaboration under Purchase Order Purchase -> Purchase Order Item Groups -> Determine
Number Ranges for Purchase Order Item Groups.
See also
- SAP Library for SAP Supply Network Collaboration on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com,
under Purchase Order Collaboration -> Special Topics in Purchase Order Collaboration ->
Purchase Order Item Group
- Release note SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Collaboration Folders Integration (Enhanced)
2.6.31.3 SCM_SNC_GEN_1: Selection Parameters on Web Screens (Enhanced)
Use
As of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration (SAP SNC) 7.0, a number of
additional selection parameters are available on various screens..
Effects on Existing Data
On the purchase order worklist, additional selection parameters are available for the worklist object types:
- In the Confirm&Publish Purchase Order Items (Supplier) worklist object type the following
additional selection parameters are available:
- Customer batch
- Item changed on (relative to today)
- Item changed on
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 226
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Seller
- Original sales order number
- WBS element
- Approval status
- Exception
- Group indicator
- In the Canceled / Blocked Purchase Order Items (Supplier) worklist object type the following
additional selection parameters are available:
- Product group
- Product group type
- Customer batch
- Item changed on (relative to today)
- Item changed on
- Seller
- Original sales order number
- WBS element
- Approval status
- Group indicator
- In the Purchase Order Items (Supplier) worklist object type the following additional selection
parameters are available:
- Customer batch
- Item changed on (relative to today)
- Item changed on
- Seller
- Original sales order number
- WBS eement
- Approval satus
- Exception
- Group indicator
- In the Rejected Purchase Order Items worklist object type the following additional selection
parameters are available:
- Customer batch
- Item changed on (relative to today)
- Item changed on
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 227
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________
- Group indicator
- Purchasing group
- In the Purchase Order Items (Customer) worklist object type the following additional selection
parameters are available:
- Customer batch
- Item changed on (relative to today)
- Item changed on
- Seller
- Original sales order number
- WBS element
- Approval status
- Exception
- Group indicator
- Purchasing group
In the supplier view of the due list for purchasing documents, the following additional selection
parameters are available:
- Approval status
- Confirmation status
- Order document type
In the customer view of the due list for purchasing documents, the following additional selection
parameters are available:
- Approval status
- Confirmation status
- Order document type
- Purchasing group
On the Documents Requiring Invoices screen, the shipping date is available as a selection parameter.
The purchasing group is now available as a selection parameter on the following screens:
- Customer worklists for purchase orders as described above
- Customer overview screens for purchase orders, advanced shipping notifications, releases, and
invoices
- Customer due list for purchasing documents (as described above) and the customer receipts and
requirements list
______________________________________________________________
SAP AG 228
SAP-System
______________________________________________________________